EXAM PAPERS PLUS BLOG   >  Grammar Schools

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Woodford County High School for Girls website

Founded in 1919, Woodford County High School (WCHS) is a selective all-girls grammar based in the London Borough of Redbridge. The school teaches a broad, stimulating academic curriculum to over 800 girls and prides itself on providing a diverse, friendly and innovative environment for pupils to flourish.

 

WCHS teaches the skills required for modern life and provides its pupils with the latest technology and first-rate facilities to achieve this outcome. Woodford County High School for Girls is a sought-after grammar for Year 7 entry.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Woodford County High School for Girls

 

Address: Woodford County High School, High Road, Woodford Green IG8 9LA

County: London Borough of Redbridge

Admissions Info: enquiries@woodford.redbridge.sch.uk, 020 8504 0611

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 853 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admissions to Woodford County High School for Girls are managed by the local authority, the London Borough of Redbridge (LBR). There is plenty of competition for the 180 Year 7 places at WCHS, so parents are advised to visit the school ahead of registration.

 

In the event of there being more applicants than available Year 7 places, the school applies the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after and previously looked after children
  • Children living in the school’s catchment area who are entitled to the Pupil Premium (up to 18 places)
  • Other children living in the catchment area, according to the total standardised score in overall order of merit
  • Children living outside the catchment area, according to the total standardised score in overall order of merit.

 

You can find more details of WCHS’s admissions process and catchment area via the school’s website here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Woodford County High School for Girls

 

Year 7 admission to Woodford County High School for Girls is based on the results of an eleven plus exam entrance test. To be eligible to sit this exam, parents must register their daughter before the closing date via the LBR’s website. LBR does not accept any late applications, even under exceptional circumstances, and there is no waiting list available either.

 

Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Woodford County High School for Girls uses the CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) exam by University of Durham. This 11+ test covers:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning, including vocabulary and comprehension
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning, testing the ability to see how objects relate to each other
  • Numerical Reasoning, testing the ability to solve maths problems

 

The tests are multiple choice and the results are fully standardised and age weighted to ensure fairness for all candidates.

 

How to Prepare for the Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

To gain one of the 180 Year 7 places at Woodford County High School for Girls, students need to be fully prepared ahead of the exam and have a solid understanding of what type of test questions to expect. Our guide to studying for the 11+ exam will help parents and students to ensure that everything is covered ahead of the tests.

 

The WCHS eleven plus exam tests children’s reasoning ability (numerical, verbal and non-verbal). If students need some additional work in this area, we would also suggest reading the following articles:

 

 

Parents should also try to introduce practice exam papers into their daughter’s revision routine early, ideally under timed conditions.

 

For Woodford County High School for Girls 11 plus revision, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Woodford County High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wolverhampton Girls' High School website

Founded in 1911, Wolverhampton Girls’ High School is a girls-only grammar that teaches over 700 pupils aged 11-18. Previously a Language College, it became an academy in 2014. Pupils are split across four houses – Audley, Ferrers, Paget and Stafford. Throughout each school year, the houses compete in a range of activities, including sport, music and the House Arts Festival.

 

The school offers a broad extracurricular programme to help girls engage in all aspects of school life. As well as an impressive sport selection, pupils can participate in residential trips across the world and become involved in the school’s various music opportunities.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wolverhampton Girls’ High School

 

Address: Wolverhampton High School for Girls, Tettenhall Road, Tettenhall, Wolverhampton WV6 0BY

County: West Midlands – Wolverhampton

Admissions Info: enquiries@wghs.org.uk, 01902 551515

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 741 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 145

Open Day Date: April

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham): Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Consortium

 

Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Wolverhampton Girls’ High School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 145 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend an open event, where more information about the admissions process is provided.

 

Late candidates will only be considered following the initial allocation of places, so it is always advised to meet the registration deadline in the first instance.

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium
  3. Children who live nearest to the school

 

Learn more about Wolverhampton Girls’ High School Year 7 admissions process via its website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wolverhampton Girls’ High School

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Wolverhampton’s Girls’ High School, parents need to register their daughter well in advance of the year of entry. Applications are completed online via the school website, here. Parents must complete two forms for eleven plus entry: The Entrance Test Registration Form and the Local Authority (LA) form, also known as a Secondary School Preference Form. The latter document needs to be returned to the LA directly by the deadline date specified on the form.

 

Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11+ exam for Wolverhampton Girls’ follows the same structure as other grammar schools in the Wolverhampton and Wrekin region. The exam will test:

 

 

The four subjects are split over two tests, each lasting 45 minutes, with each test divided into individually timed sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

One of the most effective ways to prepare for the 11 Plus exam at Wolverhampton Girls’ High School is to use practice exam papers. Not only do they help identify a child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they can also help to improve their time management skills.

 

All of our practice papers come complete with answers, so parents can accurately measure their child’s performance from session-to-session. We have a selection of 11 Plus exam papers to choose from to help students prepare for entry to Wolverhampton Girls.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Wolverhampton Girls’ High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Dr Challoner’s Grammar School website

Founded in 1624, Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, known as DCGS, is a selective grammar school for boys with a co-educational sixth form. Located in Amersham, in Buckinghamshire, the school gained academy status in 2011. The school operates a house system, with each house named after a previous headteacher.

 

Dr Challoner’s is one of the UK’s top performing grammar schools and competition for Year 7 entry is high. Known for producing outstanding GCSE results, DCGS also offers a range of extra-curricular activities and has an impressive list of former pupils.

 

For an insight into academic life at Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, take a look at this short promotional video:

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Dr Challoner’s Grammar School

 

Address: Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, Chesham Rd, Amersham, HP6 5HA

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: admissions@challoners.com, 01494 787500

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,281 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Year 7 Admissions

 

From 2018, admission to Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which aims to select based on academic ability.

 

The Secondary Transfer test is created by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.

 

More information about the admissions process at Dr Challoner’s Grammar is available on the school’s website, here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test 11 plus exam, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School holds Open Mornings three times a year until the summer term. These mornings include a presentation from the Headteacher, as well as a tour of the school campus. Parents and prospective students will also have the opportunity to meet staff members and current pupils. It should be noted that places on these open mornings are limited, so the school advises that parents reserve a place beforehand by contacting the school on 01494 787500.

 

As one of the UK’s top performing grammar schools, competition for 11 plus entry in Year 7 is high. The school website states that in 2017, of the 530 qualified applicants, 233 listed DCGS as their first preference. The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after children or previously looked after children
  • Students who live within the school’s catchment area and qualify for free school meals
  • Pupils with a brother who already attends the school and lives within the catchment area
  • Boys who live closest to the school.

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked again, in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria.

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website. The school website also has a useful FAQs page that provides additional information on Year 7 entry.

 

How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Dr Challoner’s Grammar School

 

Pupils who currently attend a primary school in Buckinghamshire are automatically registered to take Dr Challoner’s 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. However, parents still need to complete and return the school’s Supplementary Information Form, which is available to download from the school website, here.

 

Students that live outside of the school’s catchment area and wish to attend Dr Challoner’s Grammar, need to be registered using the Bucks online application portal.

 

As with all Secondary Transfer Tests in Buckinghamshire, results are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School uses the Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers. The first, tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.

 

Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Maths section – 25%

 

Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.

 

In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Dr Challoner’s, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.

 

As with other Buckinghamshire grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar 11 plus (11+) exam?

 

Preparing for the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test takes practice. Students who have prepared for the test in an organised way are more likely to have a competitive edge over their peers. At Exam Papers Plus, we advise parents to create a revision timetable with their child to ensure that each topic is covered in detail. The sooner pupils start preparing for the Secondary Transfer Test, the more time they’ll have to improve any weak areas.

 

We specialise in publishing practice tests for grammar and independent school entry, and our resources can be used to prepare for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test. Not only do our practice tests help familiarise students with the layout of entrance exams, they also help them to identify the types of questions they may be asked on the day of the tests.

 

We’d recommend that parents introduce our tests early in their child’s revision as they can be a great way to identify weaker areas. Once parents know where their child’s strengths and weaknesses lie, they can adjust their revision timetable to suit.

 

In the lead up to the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we’d recommend that students complete our tests under timed conditions to get them used to answering questions quickly and under time pressure.

 

For subject-specific practice for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar School 11+ exam, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools: Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools: Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar Schools: Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools: Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools: Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools: Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving: Grammar Schools

 

The information provided about Dr Challoner’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Burnham Grammar School 11 plus (11+) E

Please note: The information in this post reflects the recent changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.

 

Founded in 1960, Burnham Grammar School, known as BGS for short, is a co-educational grammar school that educates students aged between 11 and 18, located in Burnham, in Buckinghamshire. In 2011, the school gained academy status. Burnham Grammar is also a Specialist Science College.

 

The school operates a house system, where students compete throughout the academic year in various sporting and extra-curricular activities. Students are split over four houses, each named after an influential historical figure. The four houses are Winton (named after Nicholas Winton), Roosevelt (Eleanor Roosevelt), King (Martin Luther King, Jr), and Ali (Muhammad Ali).

 

For an insight into academic life at Burnham Grammar School, take a look at this short promotional video:

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Burnham Grammar School

 

Address: Burnham Grammar School, Hogfair Lane, Burnham, SL1 7HG

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: info@burnhamgrammar.org.uk, 01628 604812

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 879 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)

Open Day Date: June, September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Burnham Grammar School Year 7 Admissions

 

From 2018, Year 7 admission to Burnham Grammar is determined by how pupils perform in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. This 11 plus exam is designed to identify students with the aptitude and ability for an education at Burnham.

 

The test is produced by the exam board, GL Assessment and is administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme. Burnham Grammar School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium.

 

With 150 Year 7 places available at the school, competition for entry is high. However, as the school’s website states, in the last 5 years, all Year 7 students who live within 10 miles of the school have been allocated places.

 

As with all Buckinghamshire schools, applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Burnham Grammar School outlines its full admissions policy on its website, here. Further information on the Bucks schools’ admissions, can be found on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

Further questions about the Secondary Transfer Test should be directed to the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

Burnham Grammar School also runs open events from late September through to October. These events provide parents and prospective students with the opportunity to learn more about what the school has to offer. The events also include a tour of the school, where parents and students can see its facilities, and speak to members of staff.

 

For more information on how to book one of the open events, please see the school’s current prospectus.

 

Although all students within the school’s catchment area typically receive Year 7 places, where there are more applicants than available places, the school gives priority to:

 

  • Looked After, or previously looked after children
  • Children who live within the school’s catchment area and qualify for free school meals
  • Pupils who live within the catchment area in the year preceding admission
  • Students who have a brother or sister that already attends the school
  • Children with exceptional medical or social needs
  • Students who qualify for Free School Meals
  • Pupils who live closest to the school

 

Burnham Grammar also operates a waiting list when the school is oversubscribed. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked again, in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria.

 

If students are refused entry on the basis that the school is full, parents can make a representation to an Independent Appeal Panel. For appeals information, please visit the Bucks County Council website, here.

 

Burnham Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.

 

How to Apply for 11+ Year 7 Entry to Burnham Grammar School

 

Students who currently attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to take the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, unless parents withdraw them from the testing process. However, parents do need to name Burnham Grammar School on their child’s Local Authority Preference Form and return it before the deadline date.

 

Students that live outside of the school’s catchment area need to be registered using the Bucks online application portal. Burnham School estimates that approximately 50% of its Year 7 population is made up of students from outside the catchment area.

 

Results of the Secondary Transfer Test are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

For more information on the Bucks admissions procedure, please contact Buckinghamshire County Council using the Admissions Team Contact Form on their website.

 

Burnham Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

Burnham Grammar School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. The exam consists of two test papers. The first focuses on comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning. The second test paper is made up of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.

 

All questions are multiple-choice and each test lasts approximately 45 minutes. The 11+ Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills – 50%
  • Non-verbal – 25%
  • Maths– 25%

 

At Burnham Grammar School, the Secondary Transfer Test is taken by students in September of Year 6. The tests are also age standardised to ensure fairness to all students. For more information on the test dates at Burnham, please follow this link.

 

Although the Secondary Transfer Test does not have a pass mark, students do need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above to be considered for a Year 7 place at Burnham Grammar School.

 

As with all other Buckinghamshire grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the 11+ Burnham Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test?

 

The sooner students start preparing for the Secondary Transfer Test, the more time they’ll have to improve any weak areas before test day. At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that help pupils prepare for grammar school entrance exams, like the 11 plus exam at Burnham Grammar. Introducing our tests early in a child’s revision can help identify their weak areas. Once parents know where their child needs to improve, they can adjust their revision schedule to suit.

 

Our practice tests also help familiarise students with the types of questions that they’re likely to be asked in the test. As the Secondary Transfer Test approaches, we’d advise students to take our papers under test conditions to get them used to answering questions quickly and under time pressure.

 

For subject-specific practice for the Burnham Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources that have been specifically designed with this test in mind:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools: Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools: Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar Schools: Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools: Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools: Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools: Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving: Grammar Schools

 

The information provided about Burnham Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Beaconsfield High School website

Please note: The information in this post reflects the recent changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.

 

Beaconsfield High School, known locally as Becky High, is a girls’ grammar school based in Beaconsfield, in Buckinghamshire. The school educates girls aged between 11 and 18. Admission to Beaconsfield is determined by student performance in the 11+ Secondary Transfer Test. With approximately 1,100 students at the school, and 180 Year 7 places available, competition for entry is high.

 

The school operates a house system, where girls compete in a range of activities throughout the academic year. Beaconsfield High School offers a range of modern facilities, including 60 classrooms and a ‘sixth form area’ with an additional 12 classrooms. The school has a fully equipped computer room and a sixth form common room.

 

For a virtual tour of Beaconsfield High School, take a look at this short video:

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Beaconsfield High School

 

Address: Beaconsfield High School, Wattleton Road, Beaconsfield, HP9 1RR

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: garcia-b@beaconsfieldhigh.bucks.sch.uk, 01494 673043

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,100 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Beaconsfield High School Year 7 Admissions

 

Beaconsfield High School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium. From 2018, admission to Year 7 is dependent on pupil performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. The exam board for the test is GL Assessment and it is administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.

 

As with all Buckinghamshire schools, applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Beaconsfield High School outlines its full admissions policy on its website, here, and further information is provided on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

Parents who have further questions about about the Secondary Transfer Test should contact the Admissions Team by email at office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

Beaconsfield High School encourages parents and prospective students to visit the school ahead of taking the admissions test. The school organises campus tours three times a week during term time, except during May and June, when public exams take place. The tours are carried out by current pupils of the school. These tours provide parents with the opportunity to see the facilities on offer and to meet members of staff. To book a tour, please email reception@beaconsfieldhigh.bucks.sch.uk.

 

As competition for Year 7 entry to the school is high, Beaconsfield often uses its oversubscription criteria to allocate places. In such instances, where there are more applicants than available places, the school gives priority to:

 

  • Girls who are looked after, or previously looked after
  • Students who live within the school’s catchment area and are entitled to free school meals
  • Pupils who have a sister that already attends Beaconsfield High School
  • Girls who live closest to the school
  • Students with a sister at the school
  • Pupils who live outside the catchment area in order of distance from the school

 

Beaconsfield also operates a waiting list when the school is over-subscribed.

 

How to Apply for 11+ Year 7 Entry to Beaconsfield High School

 

Girls who currently attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to sit the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, unless parents withdraw them from the testing process.

 

Students that live outside of the school’s catchment area, or don’t attend one of Beaconsfield’s partner schools, should register their child using the Bucks online application portal, regardless of where they live. The application portal can be accessed on the Grammar Schools and Transfer Test page of the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

Results of the Secondary Transfer Test are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

Parents who require information on the application process at Beaconsfield High School should contact Buckinghamshire County Council using the Admissions Team Contact Form on their website.

 

Beaconsfield High School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

The 11 plus Beaconsfield High School Secondary Transfer Test has two test papers that consist of:

 

  1. Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning.
  2. Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and mathematics.

 

Each test paper lasts for approximately 45 minutes. All questions are multiple-choice and are answered on a separate answer sheet. The 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Mathematics section – 25%

 

At Beaconsfield High School, the Secondary Transfer Test is taken by students in September of Year 6, with all children taking the test on the same day, regardless of whether they live within the Buckinghamshire catchment area or not. The tests are also age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test dates, please visit the Beaconsfield High School website, here.

 

It should also be noted that the Secondary Transfer Test does not have a pass mark. Instead, students need to achieve a qualifying score of 121 or above. Students need to meet this score or be deemed qualified by a Selection Review Panel in order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Beaconsfield High School.

 

Parents of students that do not achieve the qualifying score can apply for a Selection Review if they believe that there is a good reason for their child’s under performance. The Selection Review consists of serving secondary school teachers, retired secondary teachers and primary Heads.

 

As with all Buckinghamshire grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Beaconsfield High School 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test?

 

When it comes to preparing for the Beaconsfield High School 11+ Secondary Transfer Test, it’s best to start revision early. We’d recommend that parents help their daughter create a revision timetable that outlines what needs to be studied and when. The more organised students are in their preparation, the more confident they’ll feel going into the exam.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing practice tests that help children prepare for grammar school exams, like the Secondary Transfer Test at Beaconsfield. Our practice tests can help students become better acquainted with the types of questions that may be asked in the two tests.

 

In the lead up to the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we’d advise students to take our practice tests under timed conditions, to help improve their time management skills and to get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For subject-specific practice for the Beaconsfield High School 11+ exam, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

Eleven Plus English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1

Eleven Plus English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2

Eleven Plus English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3

Eleven Plus English: Spelling

 

Eleven Plus Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1

Eleven Plus Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2

Eleven Plus Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3

Eleven Plus Maths: Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)

 

The information provided about Beaconsfield High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

screenshot of the Aylesbury High School website

Please note: The information in this post reflects the recent changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.

 

Founded in 1959, Aylesbury High School, known as AHS, is an all-girls’ grammar school located in Aylesbury, Buckinghamshire. The school was formed when Aylesbury Grammar School split into two single-sex grammar schools. With a catchment area that includes Oxford and Milton Keynes, admission to AHS is determined by pupil performance in the Secondary Transfer Test.

 

The school operates a house system, where students compete throughout the year in a range of activities. The six houses at Aylesbury High School are Ascott, Claydon, Hughenden, Missenden, Stowe, and Waddesdon. The school gained academy status in 2011.

 

For an insight into academic life at Aylesbury High School, take a look at this short promotional video:

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Aylesbury High School

 

Address: Aylesbury High School, Walton Road, Aylesbury, HP21 7SX

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, 01296 388222

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,290 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)

Open Day Date: January, March

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Aylesbury High School Year 7 Admissions

 

Aylesbury High School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium. From 2018, Year 7 entry is determined by pupil performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test,. The test is produced by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.

 

Applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Full details of Aylesbury High School’s admissions process can be found on Buckinghamshire County Council’s website, here, and on the school’s website. Any further enquiries about the Secondary Transfer Test should be directed to the Admissions Team by email at office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at Aylesbury High School, parents are encouraged to visit the school during one of its Open Mornings, which take place in January and March. The Open Mornings include a tour of the school, where parents and prospective students will have the opportunity to speak to current pupils and staff members. To book one of the mornings, parents are advised to contact the school receptionist Mrs Onley, at sonley@ahs.bucks.sch.uk.

 

In such cases that there are more applicants than available places at Aylesbury High School, it uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after girls and previously looked after girls.
  2. Students who have a sister already at the school.
  3. Pupils who have a brother that attends Aylesbury Grammar School.
  4. Girls who qualify for Free School Meals and live in the catchment area.
  5. Students that live within the catchment area of the school.
  6. Girls that live closest to the school.

 

From 2018, a waiting list will be maintained until the end of August by Aylesbury High School itself for Year 7 admissions.

 

How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Aylesbury High School

 

Girls who already attend a Buckinghamshire primary school will be automatically registered to sit the Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry to Aylesbury High School. For students that live outside of the school’s catchment area, details of how to register are made available on the Buckinghamshire County Council website before registration opens.

 

11+ test results are sent to parents before the end of October, when secondary school applications need to be submitted. Further information on how students that live out with the catchment area can apply, is available on the local authority’s registration portal.

 

Parents who require information on the application process at Aylesbury High School should contact Buckinghamshire County Council using the Admissions Team Contact Form on their website.

 

Aylesbury High School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

The new Aylesbury High School Secondary Transfer Test at 11+ consists of two test papers:

 

  1. Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning questions.

 

  1. Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.

 

All questions are multiple-choice and are answered on a separate answer sheet. Each Secondary Transfer Test paper lasts for approximately 45 minutes, with each correct answer gaining one raw mark. The verbal skills section has the most weighting at 50%, with the non-verbal and maths sections each weighted at 25%.

 

At Aylesbury High School, the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test is taken by students in September of Year 6, with all children taking the test on the same day, whether they are within the Buckinghamshire catchment area or not. The tests are age standardised to ensure that no students have an advantage based on their age.

 

The Secondary Transfer Test does not have a pass mark but does have a qualifying score of 121 or above. Students need to meet this score in order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Aylesbury High School. It should be noted however, that achieving the Secondary Transfer Test Score (STTS), does not guarantee a place at the school. Each grammar school in Buckinghamshire sets its own additional admissions criteria.

 

Before taking the Secondary Transfer Test, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam. The practice test aims to give students the experience of taking a test under exam conditions and to help familiarise them with the layout of the 11+ STT.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Aylesbury High School Secondary Transfer Test?

 

Given the competition for Year 7 entry to Aylesbury High School, parents should ensure that their child is fully prepared for the Secondary Transfer Test. We would advise that parents and students create a study schedule well ahead of the test date, to ensure that each aspect of the test syllabus is covered.

 

The more confident a student feels going into the exam hall, the more likely they are to perform well. Students who are organised with a study schedule will have a competitive advantage over their peers who approach the test in a lesser structured way.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that help children prepare for grammar and independent school admission exams, like the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at Aylesbury High School. Our practice papers aim to familiarise students with the types of questions that they could be asked in each of the test papers.

 

When taken under exam conditions, our practice tests can be a great way to identify any weaker areas that may need improving in the lead up to the tests. Once parents know where their child’s strengths and weaknesses lie, they can adjust their study schedule accordingly.

 

For subject-specific practice for the 11 plus Aylesbury High School Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

The information provided about Aylesbury High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wilson's Grammar School website

Located in Wallington, Wilson’s School is a boys-only selective grammar that teaches over 1,000 pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1615, Wilson’s is one of the oldest state schools in the UK. The school became an academy in 2011 and consistently appears in the top 10 schools in the country for both GCSE and A-Level results.

 

Alongside a traditional curriculum, the school offers a strong co-curricular programme, with particular emphasis placed on sport and music. In fact, the school has an established programme of free vocal tuition or specialist instrumental tuition on a wind instrument for every pupil in Year 7.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wilson’s Grammar School

 

Address: Wilson’s Grammar School, Mollison Drive, Wallington SM6 9JW

County: London – Borough of Sutton

Admissions Info: admissions@wilsonsschool.sutton.sch.uk, 020 8773 2931

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,061 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September (Part One) and October (Part Two)

Exam Board Type: Part One, Selective Eligibility Test (SET), Part Two, set by school

 

Wilson’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Wilson’s Grammar School is part of Sutton’s Coordinated Admissions Scheme, where admission is solely determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET), similar to the standard 11 Plus exam. With 180 places available in Year 7, the school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of its open events. At these events, parents will learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.

 

Schools within the Borough of Sutton are consistently oversubscribed, so in the likely event of there being more applications than there are places at Wilson’s School, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children by rank order of standardised school in the entrance tests
  2. Boys eligible for Free School Meals (up to 10 places) by rank order of standardised school in the entrance tests
  3. Any remaining places will be allocated to boys according to their position in the rank order of standardised score in the entrance tests

 

Parents are advised to read Wilson’s admissions criteria before taking their son’s application further.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wilson’s Grammar School

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit the SET (Part One) must complete a Supplementary Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open. Parents must also complete the Common Application Form (CAF) issued by their Local Authority. Those who live in London or Surrey can complete the CAF online.

 

If students are successful in the SET, they will be invited to sit the Second Stage Entrance Examination. Should they pass this test, they must include Wilson’s School on the CAF to be eligible for consideration for a Year 7 place.

 

Wilson’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Wilson’s Grammar School 11+ tests are split into two stages:

 

  • Stage 1: Maths and English, both multiple-choice and each last approximately 45 minutes.

 

This Selective Eligibility Test (SET) is run in conjunction with other grammar schools in Sutton such as Sutton Grammar School and Wallington County Grammar School. The result of the SET determines whether or not a boy is eligible for the second stage test.

 

  • Stage 2: English and Mathematics – the English test includes an extended writing task and tests comprehension skills, while the maths test is based on the KS2 curriculum and is standard format. Both tests last 40-45 minutes.

 

How to Prepare for the Wilson’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Sutton-based selective grammar schools do not reveal information about their selection examinations. This can be daunting for parents ahead of the exam, but with a good revision plan and the use of  practice papers, parents can give their son the best possible chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Wilson’s School.

 

To get ahead of the fierce competition at Wilson’s, we would recommend using the following practice tests, which have been specifically designed to help students prepare for the Selective Eligibility Test:

 

Stage 1 (S.E.T)

 

Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1

Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2

Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3

Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4

 

For further subject-specific practice, we would recommend the following:

 

Eleven Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

Eleven Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

Eleven Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

Eleven Plus English: Spelling

 

Eleven Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

Eleven Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

Eleven Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

Eleven Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

Stage 2

 

For Stage 2, we would recommend the following packs:

 

Eleven Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

Eleven Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

Eleven Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

Eleven Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

The information provided about Wilson’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wirral Grammar School for Girls website

Founded in 1931, Wirral Grammar School for Girls is an all-girls grammar based in Merseyside. Over 1,000 girls aged 11-18 attend the high-performing school, which has been rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted in every department.

 

Wirral Girls is a Specialist Language College, a Humanities College and a Science College. It is an academy that is proud to offer modern facilities to its staff and pupils. The school’s main vision is to provide a happy and stimulating environment for its pupils and does so by offering a challenging curriculum alongside a fun and friendly co-curricular programme.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wirral Grammar School for Girls

 

Address: Heath Road, Bebington, Wirral, CH63 3AF

County: Merseyside

Admissions Info: schooloffice@wirralgirls.co.uk, 0151 644 8282

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,068

Number of Places in Year 7: 175

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Wirral Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

All 175 Year 7 places at Wirral Grammar School for Girls are allocated based on pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Before applying for a place, it is suggested that parents visit the school at one of its open events, where they can ask questions about the admissions process before committing any further.

 

With over eight applications for each Year 7 place, it is likely that the school will be oversubscribed. In such cases, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Girls in public care
  2. Girls with a valid medical reason (doctor’s letter must be supplied)
  3. Girls with a sister attending the school at the time of application
  4. Girls with a parent who works at the school for a minimum of two years
  5. Distance from the home address to the school

 

The school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded directly from their website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wirral Grammar School for Girls

 

Wirral Grammar School for Girls is one of four schools based in Wirral that follow a coordinated scheme for secondary school admissions. This is maintained by Wirral Council, the Local Authority (LA). To apply for a Year 7 grammar place, complete this admissions form in the first instance.

 

Parents will be notified of results via post from mid-October and the first round of place allocations will be available from the beginning of March.

 

Wirral Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Wirral Grammar School for Girls 11+ exam consists of two papers that each last around 50 minutes. Both are made-up of a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering:

 

 

Test results are fully age-standardised to ensure that no pupil has an advantage based on their age.

 

How to Prepare for the Wirral Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

For your daughter to have the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Wirral Grammar School for Girls, she should invest additional time in revision on top of her usual school work. Children are shown to respond better to shorter bursts of revision, so just 15-20 minutes each day can make a real difference to her knowledge ahead of the exam.

 

A great way to highlight any knowledge gaps ahead of the eleven plus is to use practice exam papers as part of their revision. These 11+ papers come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their daughter’s performance and track her improvements in the lead-up to the exam.

 

For pupils preparing for the Wirral Grammar School for Girls entrance exam, we have several 11 plus practice papers that can help:

 

11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)

11 Plus Cloze (CEM)

11 Plus Spelling (CEM)

 

The information provided about Wirral Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wilmington Grammar School website

Founded in 1958, Wilmington Grammar School for Girls (WGSG) is a Kent-based selective grammar with a co-educational Sixth Form for girls aged 11-18. An academy school, WGSG was awarded specialist status for maths and computing in 2004.

 

Alongside a traditional curriculum, the school offers its pupils the chance to develop skills and gain experience through several extracurricular activities including choir practice, acting lessons and a variety of sports.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wilmington Grammar School for Girls

 

Address: Wilmington Grammar School for Girls, Wilmington Grange, Parsons Lane, Wilmington, Dartford DA2 7BB

County: Kent

Admissions Info: enquiries@wgsg.co.uk, 01322 226351

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 930 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test

 

Wilmington Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Wilmington Grammar School for Girls, prospective pupils must sit the Kent eleven plus test and achieve the required standard. Parents and children are invited to attend one of the school’s open events to ask any questions they have about the admissions process. Parents may also take a tour of the school and meet staff and current pupils.

 

With 150 Year 7 places available at WGSG, the school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such instances, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Children with a sibling at the school
  3. Children with a brother at Wilmington Grammar School for Boys at the time of starting
  4. Children eligible for Pupil Premium
  5. Children who live within 1.5 miles of the school
  6. Up to 15 Governor places, for those children who have shown exceptional performance in mathematics
  7. Eligible children who live in the parishes outlined in this document
  8. All other girls

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wilmington Grammar School for Girls

 

As Wilmington Grammar School for Girls uses the Kent Test as a means of selection in Year 7, parents must register online with Kent Local Authority (LA) in the first instance.

 

Once students have taken the Kent Test at 11+, parents are required to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive 11+ results from the Council by mid-October, with offers sent out in March.

 

If parents have any further queries about WGSG’s admissions process at Year 7, they are encouraged to email the school at enquiries@wgsg.co.uk or call 01322 226351.

 

Wilmington Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Most Kent-based selective schools require pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam, including WGSG. The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that is divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
  2. A 60-minute test that focuses on reasoning. It is divided into three sections:

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task, which will not form part of the final 11 Plus result but can be used in any borderline or appeal cases.

 

You can learn more about the Kent Test with these sample questions and gain further clarification on what to expect from the exam.

 

How to Prepare for the Wilmington Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is one of the most competitive grammar school areas in England, so for students to secure one of the 150 Year 7 places at Wilmington Grammar School for Girls, they should do additional revision on top of their usual homework.

 

Primary school children are shown to perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer period of time. Revision sessions should be manageable and split into ‘little and often’ study sessions.

 

The Kent Test requires children to have a solid knowledge of a number of subjects, so if parents suspect that their daughter has a weaker area, we recommend using practice exam papers to highlight these areas early on. Don’t be afraid to introduce these papers early on as they can act as a diagnostic, highlighting strengths and weaknesses.

 

Girls sitting the Kent Test with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at WGSG will benefit from these resources:

 

 

Additionally, if students require further practice in a particular subject area ahead of the exam, the following practice papers are ideal:

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Spelling (GL)

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Wilmington Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wirral Grammar School for Boys website

Founded in 1931, Wirral Grammar School for Boys is a selective grammar for students aged 11-18. Situated on a campus spread across nine acres in Bebington, the school has academy status and teaches in excess of 1,000 pupils.

 

While the school’s primary focus is to provide a strong academic grounding to its pupils, it does offer a diverse extracurricular programme outside of the classroom. Activities include student radio, an enterprise programme and charitable fundraising.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wirral Grammar School for Boys

 

Address: Cross Ln, Birkenhead, Bebington, Wirral, CH63 3AQ

County: Merseyside

Admissions Info: schooloffice@wirralgrammarboys.com, 0151 644 0908

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,077 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 155

Open Day Date: Throughout the academic year

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Wirral Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

Prospective pupils living on the Wirral and in the surrounding county of Cheshire can apply for a Year 7 place at Wirral Grammar School for Boys.

 

With 155 places available, admission is based on student performance in the 11 Plus exam. Children who attend primary school on the Wirral can take the entrance test at their school, while pupils who live outside of the county can take the test at one of the Wirral’s four selective schools.

 

The school has reported over eight applications for each Year 7 place, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after, or previously looked after, boys
  • Boys with a valid medical reason, supported by a doctor’s letter
  • Boys eligible for Free School Meals (up to 15 places)
  • Boys who have a brother at the school at the time of application
  • Shortest distance from a boy’s permanent residence to the school

 

For more information about Wirral Grammar School for Boys’ admissions procedure at Year 7, refer to the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wirral Grammar School for Boys

 

Wirral County Council administers the 11 Plus test for all four Wirral-based selective schools. This Local Authority (LA) recommends that parents apply for a Year 7 grammar place online, via its admissions form. Pupils living on the Wirral should apply directly to this LA, while those living in Cheshire should apply directly to Cheshire LA.

 

Parents will receive test results in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March the following year.

 

Wirral Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Pupils sitting the 11 Plus test for Wirral Grammar School for Boys will be tested on:

 

 

Boys will sit two tests, each lasting approximately 50 minutes. The tests will contain a mixture of multiple choice and standard format questions. Test results are fully age-standardised to ensure that no pupil has an advantage based on their age.

 

How to Prepare for the Wirral Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

Eleven plus exam dates are set well in advance, giving students plenty of time to prepare for the tests. The sooner students start studying for the tests, the more time they will have to improve their overall performance.

 

Before students begin their revision, we’d recommend that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents.

 

Competition for Year 7 places at Wirral Grammar for Boys is strong, so we recommend that students use practice exam papers as part of their general study routine. These papers allow children to get a better idea of the 11+ exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked on the day. They also help parents identify any weaker areas that may need improving.

 

For those sitting the Wirral Grammar School for Boys eleven plus exam, we recommend the following resources:

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM M.C. Numerical Reasoning

 

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ Comprehension

11+ Cloze

11+ Spelling

 

The information provided about Wirral Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the West Kirby Grammar School website

Located on the Wirral in Merseyside, West Kirby Grammar School (WKGS) is a selective grammar for girls aged 11-18 with boys admitted into the school’s Sixth Form. Founded in 1913, the school achieved academy status in 2012.

 

Over 1,100 pupils are divided across six houses: Furniss, Gonner, Hudson, Paton, Stewart and Wallis. These houses compete throughout each school year across a range of events, including music shows and sports.

 

For an insight into academic life at West Kirby Grammar School, watch this short promotional video:

 

11 Plus Exam Information for West Kirby Grammar School

 

Address: West Kirby Grammar School Graham Road, West Kirby, Wirral, CH48 5DP

County: Merseyside

Admissions Info: office@wkgs.net, 0151 632 3449

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,193 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Dates: September and May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

West Kirby Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

West Kirby Grammar welcomes pupils from the Wirral and surrounding areas to apply for a place in Year 7. With 180 places available, admission is based on

student performance in the eleven plus exam. Those children who attend a Wirral-based primary will take the test at their school, while pupils who live outside of the county are able to take the test at one of the four Wirral selective schools.

 

The 11 Plus exam for WKGS is administered by Wirral County Council and follows the CEM Durham University exam format. Parents should be aware that good performance in the exam does not guarantee a place at the school, due to oversubscription.

 

In the event of there being more applications than there are places, the school will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after, or previously looked after, girls
  • Girls with a valid medical reason, supported by a doctor’s letter
  • Girls eligible for Free School Meals (up to 15 places)
  • Girls who have a sister at the school at the time of application
  • Shortest distance from a girl’s permanent residence to the school

 

The school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded directly from their website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to West Kirby Grammar School

 

West Kirby Grammar is one of four Wirral-based schools that follow a coordinated scheme for secondary school admissions, maintained by Wirral Council, the Local Authority (LA).

 

The LA recommends parents apply for a Year 7 grammar place online, via its admissions form. Late applications will be directly dealt with by Wirral LA.

 

West Kirby Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam at West Kirby Grammar School consists of two tests that will cover:

 

Each test lasts approximately 50 minutes and contains a mixture of multiple choice and standard format questions. Test results are age-standardised to ensure that no pupil has an advantage based on their age.

 

How to Prepare for the West Kirby Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we highly recommend preparing for the 11+ well ahead of the exam date. The sooner children start studying for the tests, the more time they will have to improve their overall performance.

 

Parent should create a study timetable with their child to ensure that they cover everything they will need to know. To give students the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at West Kirby Grammar, we would also recommend introducing practice exam papers early into their additional study routine. Not only do practice papers enable parents to identify their child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they can help them become familiar with the exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked.

 

As the exam date gets closer, parents should encourage their child to do timed practice papers under exam conditions. This will help students get used to answering questions under pressure, as will be required in the exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the West Kirby Grammar School 11 Plus exam:

 

Eleven Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

Eleven Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

Eleven Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

Eleven Plus Comprehension (CEM)

Eleven Plus Cloze (CEM)

Eleven Plus Spelling (CEM)

 

The information provided about West Kirby Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wilmington Grammar School for Boys website

Founded in 1954, Wilmington Grammar School for Boys (WGSB) is located in Dartford, Kent. Previously called Dartford Technical High School, it took on its grammar status in 1982. An academy school, over 900 pupils are split across five houses: Brunel, Darwin, Newton, Stevenson and Telford.

 

A specialist engineering school, WGSB has a strong emphasis on design technology, mathematics and physics. Alongside its traditional curriculum, the school runs a programme to help develop boys’ entrepreneurial skills, encouraging them to be at the forefront of innovation for modern life.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wilmington Grammar School for Boys

 

Address: Wilmington Grammar School for Boys, Common Lane, Wilmington, Dartford DA2 7DA

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@wgsb.org.uk, 01322 223090

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 905 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam

 

Wilmington Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Wilmington Grammar School for Boys, prospective pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. There are 150 Year 7 places available at WGSB for Yeat 7 entry. Should applications for admission exceed this number, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Children with a sibling at the school when the child starts
  3. Governor places (up to 15, awarded to children who have shown exceptional performance in the Kent Test)
  4. Children eligible for Pupil Premium (who live within 3 miles of the school)
  5. Children who live within a 1.5-mile radius of the school and children who live within the parishes listed in this document
  6. All other boys

 

Parents of students who are not awarded a grammar school place at WGSB have a right to appeal. The school’s website provides further information about the admissions process.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wilmington Grammar School for Boys

 

WGSB’s Year 7 admissions are coordinated by Kent County Council, the Local Authority (LA). To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete an online registration form.

 

Once your son has taken the Kent Test at eleven plus, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it online to Kent County Council. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the Council in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March of the following year.

 

Wilmington Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Wilmington Grammar School for Boys is one of the Kent-based selective schools that use the Kent Test at 11 Plus. This exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with a separate answer sheet, in the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Children will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.

 

  1. A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases and/or in appeals for a school place.

 

How to Prepare for the Wilmington Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent has gained a reputation for being one of the most competitive grammar school areas in the UK, so to keep your son ahead of the competition, he must start his revision for the 11 Plus early. Parents should help create an easy-to-follow revision timetable that covers all the required subjects. Ensure that time is allocated for play and relaxation too, as this is likely to keep your son more motivated throughout his revision periods.

 

For the Kent 11+ Test, practice exam papers should be an essential part of a child’s revision routine. These papers can help parents monitor their son’s progress and give children a much-needed confidence boost as the exam date approaches.

 

We have specifically designed the following practice resources for the Kent Test:

 

 

If students needs additional practice in a particular subject, we would highly recommend the following papers:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

 

The information provided about Wilmington Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Weald of Kent Grammar School website

Located in Tonbridge, Kent, Weald of Kent Grammar School is a selective grammar for girls aged 11-18. Previously known as Tonbridge Technical High School for Girls, the school was established in its current form in 1982.

 

An academy school, it holds specialisms in languages and science and has had National Teaching School status since 2014. Although the school challenges its girls with a rigorous curriculum, it also gives students the opportunity to pursue their passions outside of the classroom.

 

To learn more about academic life at Weald of Kent, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Weald of Kent Grammar School

 

Address: Weald of Kent Grammar School, Tudeley Lane, Tonbridge TN9 2JP

County: Kent

Admissions Info: school@wealdgs.org, 01732 373500

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,422 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 265 (175 at the Tonbridge site, 90 at the Sevenoaks Annexe)

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam

 

Weald of Kent Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Weald of Kent Grammar School is determined by pupil performance in the Kent eleven plus exam. In 2017, Weald of Kent Grammar School Academy Trust was granted permission to operate an annexe in Sevenoaks. This increased the number of Year 7 places to 265 overall, across two sites.

 

When the school is oversubscribed, it will give priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children with a sibling attending the school at the time the child starts
  3. Children with Health and Special Access Reasons
  4. Children entitled to Pupil Premium (up to 18 places)
  5. Children of permanent staff members at the school
  6. Children who live closest to the school

 

Visit the school’s website for more information about its admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Weald of Kent Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Weald of Kent Grammar School, parents must register their child for the Kent Test. Under the coordinated Admissions Scheme, run by Kent County Council, parents can name four schools on the Secondary Common Application Form (SCAF). Parents must express their preferences, and rank them accordingly.

 

Kent County Council coordinates all admission applications on behalf of the school. Should parents have any questions about the admissions process, they should contact the Council, rather than the school.

 

Weald of Kent Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Weald of Kent Grammar uses the Kent Test at 11 Plus to allocate Year 7 places. Children will be tested on Reasoning, English and Maths and will have to complete a writing task.

 

The exam format is as follows:

 

  1. Reasoning: A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is broken down into three shorter sections and focuses on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  2. English and Maths: A one-hour exam that is split into two sections. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and 25-minute test. The English section will test comprehension and literacy skills, while the maths sections will contain multiple choice questions covering a range of topics that pupils will have covered up to Year 6.
  3. Writing: This 40-minute writing task will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be used in borderline cases, or by headteachers during the place allocation stage.

 

How to Prepare for the Weald of Kent Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

For students to have the best chance of gaining a place at Weald of Kent Grammar School, they need to have a thorough revision plan in place well ahead of the exam date. Regular revision will give them a better chance of improving their exam technique, while increasing their subject knowledge and learning how to perform well under exam conditions.

 

Parents can monitor their child’s academic progress with our selection of practice exam papers. These papers can help students to prepare for the Kent Test at 11 plus. We would specifically recommend the three tests below, all of which have been created with the Kent Test in mind:

 

 

For additional subject-specific revision, we would suggest these practice exam papers:

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Spelling

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Weald of Kent Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Urmston Grammar School website

Founded in 1929, Urmston Grammar School is a co-educational school located in Trafford, Greater Manchester. Before becoming an academy in 2010, Urmston Grammar was awarded High Performing Specialist School status in 2007 and then Language College status in 2008.

 

Rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, Urmston Grammar regularly features in the top five per cent of schools in the UK. The school’s primary aim is to provide its 900+ pupils with a well-rounded education, to allow them to play a positive role in society.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Urmston Grammar School

 

Address: Urmston Grammar School, Newton Road, Urmston, Manchester M41 5UG

County: Greater Manchester (Trafford)

Admissions Info: office@urmstongrammar.org.uk, 0161 748 2875

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 909 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus

 

Urmston Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Urmston Grammar is part of Trafford Grammar Schools CEM Consortium and is responsible for its own Year 7 admissions. All four schools within the Consortium use the same eleven plus test. Admission to Urmston Grammar is determined by pupil performance in this exam.

 

Urmston Grammar has 150 Year 7 places and actively encourages parents and children to attend its open day in June, ahead of applying to the school. At this event, parents can learn more about the school’s curriculum and whether it is the best learning environment for their child.

 

In recent years, Urmston Grammar has been significantly oversubscribed for Year 7 places. In such cases, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. The top 20 scoring candidates in rank order
  3. Pupils entitled to Pupil Premium (approximately 10 places)
  4. Children with parents working at the school for 8+ years in continuous service
  5. Children who live closest to the school (approximately 120 places)

 

For more information about Urmston Grammar’s admissions policy, please visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Urmston Grammar School

 

To apply for a place at Urmston Grammar, parents must register their child for the school’s entrance examination. The online registration form is available on the school’s admissions page.

 

In addition to completing the registration form, parents also need to complete a Local Authority Common Preference Form. Urmston Grammar should be listed on the form in ranked order of preference.

 

Urmston Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The eleven plus exam at Urmston Grammar consists of two test papers, covering:

Each paper lasts approximately one hour and contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions. There will be a short break between the two papers.

 

To be in with a chance of gaining a Year 7 place at the school, children need a qualifying score of 334. The results of the entrance exam are posted to parents or guardians in October, with official place offers sent out in early March.

 

How to Prepare for the Urmston Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

As a starting point, our in-depth guide to studying for the 11 Plus exam covers all the essential information that students will need for creating a revision plan. We’ve also written specific posts about the individual tests, including:

 

 

When preparing for any exam, it’s always best to start early. We highly recommend using practice exam papers to get an initial overview of a child’s current abilities and to identify their strengths and weaknesses.

 

As a student’s studying progresses, we’d suggest using these practice tests to see how they are improving. Completing timed practice tests in the run-up to the real exam will get students used to answering questions under exam conditions.

 

The practice papers that we produce come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their child’s performance and track their improvements. We have several eleven plus practice papers that can help students prepare for entry to Urmston Grammar.

 

We recommend using the following resources to prepare for the CEM 11+ exam:

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Spelling

 

The information provided about Urmston Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Upton Court Grammar School website

Founded in 1912, Upton Court Grammar School is a co-educational selective school that achieved academy status in 2011. Previously known as Slough Grammar, it has specialisms in languages and science and is based in Slough, Berkshire. Over 1,000 students from a range of backgrounds are taught a varied curriculum, while the school invests in their overall wellbeing.

 

The school encourages its pupils to be creative, offering a variety of co-curricular activities such as music, drama and arts across the school year.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Upton Court Grammar School

 

Address: Upton Court Grammar School, Lascelles Road, Slough, SL3 7PR

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: office@uptoncourtgrammar.org.uk, 01753 522892

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,027 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 165

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Upton Court Grammar has 165 Year 7 places available and admission is determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exam. The school hosts an information evening in May where parents can learn more about the school’s admissions process.

 

Admissions to Upton Court Grammar School are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools. Parents must register online ahead of their child’s eleven plus exam date.

 

In cases of oversubscription, the school uses the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children eligible for Pupil Premium (up to 15 places)
  3. Children with parents who have worked at the school for two years or more
  4. Children attending the designated feeder schools
  5. Children in rank order of performance in the 11+ tests (120 places)
  6. Children within the closest proximity to the school

 

For more details about Upton Court’s feeder schools and further information about its admission criteria, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Upton Court Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Upton Court Grammar School, parents must first register their child with the Slough Consortium. Next, parents should complete a Common Application Form (CAF); this can be done online via Slough County Council.

 

As the school follows Slough Consortium’s schedule for Year 7 place allocation, parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure their child is registered in time for the eleven plus exam.

 

Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two individual papers, each lasting approximately 60-65 minutes. The papers across all schools in the Slough Consortium are the same and cover a mixture of questions that test Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning.

 

Parents will receive the results of their child’s eleven plus exam online in October, before the deadline for submission of the CAF. All results are fully age standardised and this is the score parents will receive.

 

How to Prepare for the Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we always advise starting 11 Plus preparation early. The sooner children begin a regular study routine, the more time they will have to get used to the types of questions that may be asked in the exam.

 

A ‘little but often’ approach usually works best when it comes to studying for the tests. By breaking down revision into small chunks, students can ensure that all the exam subjects are covered.

 

Practice exam papers are a great way to help children get used to the exam layout and the allocated times that they have for each paper. Parents should introduce practice papers early into their child’s revision in order to monitor their improvement as their studying progresses.

 

As exam day approaches, parents should encourage their child to complete timed practice papers to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several eleven plus practice papers that can help students prepare for the Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus exam. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Upton Court Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Upton Hall School website

Located in the Wirral, Merseyside, Upton Hall School was founded in 1849 and is a girls-only Roman Catholic grammar school. An academy, Upton Hall not only has International School status, but is also a training school.

 

Providing a traditional curriculum, the school strives to give its pupils an all-round education and encourages them to be active members in the wider community. Girls are able to participate in a range of sporting activities and also various musical ensembles.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Upton Hall School

 

Address: Upton Hall School, FCJ, Upton, Wirral, CH49 6LJ

County: Merseyside

Admissions Info: uhs@uptonhall.org, 0151 677 7696

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 950 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 156

Open Day Dates: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Upton Hall School 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are currently 165 places allocated to Year 7 pupils at Upton Hall School. Each place allocation is determined by pupil performance in an 11+ exam. A traditional school, Upton Hall encourages prospective students and their parents to attend at least one of its open days ahead of application in order to learn more about the admissions process.

 

Late applications will be considered, but only once places have been allocated. In cases where there are more applicants than Year 7 places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Baptised Roman Catholic girls
  2. Girls who have not been baptised into the Roman Catholic Church, whose parents wish them to have a Roman Catholic education
  3. Girls who live closest to the school

 

For more information about Upton Hall School’s admission process, please visit its website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Upton Hall School

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. The registration form can be downloaded via the school’s website.

 

For students to be considered for a Year 7 place at Upton Hall, parents must include it as a choice on their Local Authority’s Preference Form. Parents will be notified of the test results in October, which will indicate whether the student has attained the required score to be eligible for admission. However, place allocations will not be made public until March the following year and passing the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of entry to the school.

 

Upton Hall School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Prospective pupils to Upton Hall School must sit two multiple choice Verbal Reasoning tests at eleven plus. Each test will last approximately 50 minutes and pupils will have a break between the two papers.

 

Scores from both tests will be added together and students who score 236 or above will be considered for admission.

 

How to Prepare for the Upton Hall School 11 Plus Exam?

 

When it comes to the eleven plus exam, preparation is key. If, however, students have left it late to begin, read our last minute 11+ preparation article for further advice.

 

To give students the best chance of performing well and gaining a place at Upton Hall, they should incorporate practice papers into their study plan. Using these papers could increase a student’s chance of surpassing the required score in the exam.

 

Parents should encourage their daughter to sit practice papers under timed conditions, as this will vastly improve their time management skills and get them used to answering all questions under time pressure.

 

As the Upton Hall School entrance exam focuses on verbal reasoning, we specifically would recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

 

The information provided about Upton Hall School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of The Tiffin Girls' School website

Founded in 1880, The Tiffin Girls’ School is a selective, all-girls grammar located in Kingston upon Thames in London. Situated on a nine-acre campus, the school became an academy in 2011. From Year 7 until Sixth Form, students are split into six houses: Bebbington, Flavell, Nicolle, Orford, Schofield and Watson – all named after previous Headmistresses of the school.

 

Pupils are encouraged to strive for excellence in everything they do, whether it’s academic achievement or an enthusiasm for arts, music or sport. Through a broad curriculum and active pastoral care, students are taught to be self-aware and to act both independently and in cooperation with others.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Tiffin Girls’ School

 

Address: Tiffin Girls’ School, Richmond Road, Kingston upon Thames KT2 5PL

County: London

Admissions Info: admissions@tiffingirls.org, 020 8546 0773

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,114 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Dates: October and November

Exam Board Type: Stage 1: Maths and English, partly multiple-choice, Stage 2: Maths and English, open answer

 

The Tiffin Girls’ School 11 Plus Admissions

 

The Tiffin Girls’ School has reported over 10 applications for every Year 7 place and, as a result, it firmly encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open evening. At this open event, parents can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff. Admission at this stage is determined by pupil performance in a two-stage entrance exam process.

 

In the likely event of oversubscription at Year 7, the school will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Girls with a Statement of Special Educational Needs or an Education Health and Care Plan (EHCP), who name The Tiffin Girls’ School specifically on the Statement or EHCP
  2. Up to 60 girls whose score in the Stage Two Test is higher than or equal to the 250th ranked mark of all applicants who sat the Stage Two Test
  3. Remaining places will be allocated from all applicants who sat the Stage Two Test who have not already been awarded a place

 

The Tiffin Girls’ School has a strict oversubscription criteria, so parents are always advised to read the latest policy to ensure they have the most up-to-date information.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Tiffin Girls’ School

 

The school operates a two-stage test procedure. To register for the Stage One Test, the online Supplementary Information Form (SIF) must be completed and received by the school. The SIF is available via the school’s website when the registration window is open.

 

Girls who pass Stage One will be invited to sit Stage Two of the test in early November. At this stage, parents must complete their Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) to be eligible for consideration for a place at The Tiffin Girls’ School.

 

Parents who have questions about the admissions process at Year 7 should email

admissions@tiffingirls.org or the school on 020 8546 0773.

 

The Tiffin Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Parents are advised to read the admissions documents on the school’s website ahead of the 11 Plus exam itself.

 

Previous tests have been split into two stages:

 

Stage One: English and Maths, partly multiple choice, similar to both GL and CEM style

 

A number of pupils will then be invited back to sit the Stage Two test.

 

Stage Two: English and Maths, set by the school. Previous tests have included comprehension, a writing task and standard format maths questions.

 

How to Prepare for The Tiffin Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The Tiffin Girls’ School does not reveal details of its exam provider for Year 7 entrance exam testing. For parents, this can be a worry, but Exam Papers Plus can help students prepare for the various elements of the assessments.

 

We would recommend that students begin their exam preparation early with practice exam papers. Not only do these papers give students a general overview of their current abilities, they also enable them to identify their strengths and weaknesses.

 

As a student’s studying progresses, they can continue to use our practice tests to check on their progress. As the exam date gets closer, we would encourage pupils  to do these practice tests under timed conditions, to get them used to working in this type of environment. Our practice papers come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their child’s performance and track their improvements.

 

We have a selection of 11 Plus practice papers that can help students prepare for both stages of The Tiffin Girls’ School entrance exam:

 

STAGE 1

 

Eleven Plus English Pack 1

Eleven Plus English Pack 2

Eleven Plus English Pack 3

Eleven Plus Spelling

11+ Comprehension

11+ Cloze

11+ Spelling

 

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 1

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 2

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 3

Eleven Plus Maths: Problem Solving

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ M.C. Numerical Reasoning

 

STAGE 2

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11+ English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11+ English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

The information provided about The Tiffin Girls’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys website

Founded as a technical school in 1956, Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys (TWGSB) became a selective grammar school for boys in 1982. The school has a co-educational Sixth Form for those aged 16-18.

 

Over 1,000 students are divided across six houses and are encouraged to explore their social and cultural interests through a range of co-curricular activities.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys

 

Address: Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys, St John’s Road, Tunbridge Wells TN4 9XB

County: Kent

Admissions Info: thegrammarschool@twgsboys.kent.sch.uk, 01892 529551

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,194

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

All 180 Year 7 places at Tunbridge Wells Grammar are allocated on the basis of student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. Admissions are dealt with by Kent County Council, so parents should register their children directly with the local authority.

 

In instances where there are more applicants than Year 7 places, TWGSB uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children in care, or who have previously been in care
  2. Children with a sibling at the school at the time of a child starting in Year 7
  3. Health and Special Access Reasons
  4. Children who live within a 3-mile radius of the school
  5. Children who live in the named parishes outlined here
  6. Nearness of all other children’s homes to the school

 

More information about TWGSB’s admissions criteria is available on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys

 

Parents are able to express four school preferences on a Secondary Common Application Form (SCAF), which should be returned to the Local Authority (LA).

 

For admission to TWGSB, applicants will need to have secured a ‘grammar’ assessment and named Tunbridge Wells Grammar on the SCAF.

 

Parents will be notified of the result of the offer of a school place in March by the LA.

 

Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The majority of Kent’s 35 selective grammar schools and 4 partially selective schools use the Kent Test at 11 Plus for Year 7 places. The Kent Exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with a separate answer sheet, in the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. This includes Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.

 

  1. A 40-minute writing task. This will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be used in borderline cases.

 

How to Prepare for the Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

In order for your son to secure a Year 7 place at TWGSB, he will need to be well-prepared for the Kent Test. Children generally perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer period of time. A ‘little and often’ approach typically works best and ensures that they don’t become overwhelmed with studying.

 

We recommend using practice exam papers as a way of highlighting any areas that need additional work. Don’t be afraid to introduce practice papers at the beginning of your child’s revision, as they will enable you to diagnose their strengths and weaknesses.

 

Pupils sitting the Kent Test, with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys, will hugely benefit from these resources:

 

11 Plus Kent Practice Test 1
11 Plus Kent Practice Test 2
11 Plus Kent Practice Test 3

 

If your son needs additional work on a particular subject, we would also recommend the following practice exam papers:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

The information provided about Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School website

Founded in 1905, Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School (TWGGS) is a girls-only selective school in Kent. Over 1,000 pupils are taught a traditional curriculum, while building skills that will hold them in good stead for the modern world.

 

TWGGS has enjoyed great success in the creative arts and specialises in music with English. The school’s students also participate in a range of sporting activities, including football, curling and hockey.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School

 

Address: Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School, Southfield Road, Tunbridge Wells TN4 9UJ

County: Kent

Admissions Info: info@twggs.kent.sch.uk, 01892 520902

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,005 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 140

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam

 

Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. With 140 Year 7 places available at TWGGS, the school is often oversubscribed. In such instances, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  • Children who receive Pupil Premium
  • Children with a sister attending the school
  • Children with Health and Special Access Reasons
  • Eligible girls living within the parishes/towns outlined in this document
  • Distance from home to school
  • Governors’ places (14 places)

 

For more details about the school’s catchment area and its allocation of governors’ places, visit the website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School

 

Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School Year 7 admissions are coordinated by Kent County Council, the Local Authority (LA). To register for the Kent Test at 11 Plus, parents need to complete an online registration form.

 

Once students have sat the Kent Test at eleven plus, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it online to Kent County Council. Parents will receive results of the exam via the LA in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March of the following year.

 

Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Girls hoping to gain a place at TWGGS will have to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam. This is divided into the following sections:

 

  1. A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. It is broken down into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
  3. A 40-minute writing task. This is not marked as part of the 11+ test, but it can be used as evidence for both borderline cases and in appeals for a grammar school place.

 

How to Prepare for the Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

To keep your daughter ahead of the competition for Year 7 entry at Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School, she must be organised, focused and prepare accordingly. Begin by creating an easy-to-follow revision timetable that covers all the required subjects, while also allowing time for relaxation.

 

For the Kent eleven plus test, practice exam papers should form an integral part of your child’s revision routine, as they can help you to monitor their progress.

 

For children sitting the Kent Test at 11+, we have specifically designed the following practice papers:

 

Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)
For students that need further help to improve in a particular subject, we also recommend these subject-specific practice exam papers:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

The information provided about Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Townley Grammar School website

Located in the London borough of Bexley, Townley Grammar School is a girls-only grammar for pupils aged 11-18, although its Sixth Form is co-educational. An academy school, Townley specialises in performing and visual arts, maths and computing.

 

The school offers a broad curriculum and an impressive array of extracurricular activities, including three choirs, two orchestras, a concert band and various musical productions.

 

For an insight into academic life at Townley Grammar School, watch this promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Townley Grammar School

 

Address: Townley Grammar School, Townley Road, Bexleyheath DA6 7AB

County: London (Borough of Bexley)

Admissions Info: admin@townleygrammar.org.uk ,020 8304 8311

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,469 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 224

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Townley Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Townley Grammar School is part of the Bexley Coordinated Secondary School Admissions Scheme and only students who pass the Bexley test can be considered for admission in Year 7.

 

The Bexley test aims to select the top academic students for entrance to the school with pass marks set by a selection panel of the school’s headteacher and assigned officers. However, it should be noted that passing the Bexley 11 Plus isn’t a guarantee of a Year 7 place at Townley Grammar School.

 

In cases where there are more eligible candidates than Year 7 places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Girls identified by the London Borough of Bexley as achieving one of the highest 180 scores in the selection tests and who apply for a place at Townley Grammar School
  3. Girls who have a sibling attending the school at the time of application
  4. Students with a parent or registered guardian employed at Townley Grammar School on a permanent basis at the time of application
  5. Up to 14 places for girls attracting Pupil Premium and/or Free School Meals who achieve the qualifying score in rank order of distance from the school
  6. Distance from school with priority given to pupils living nearest to the school

 

More information about the school’s oversubscription and admissions policies can be found here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Townley Grammar School

 

To apply for Year 7 entry to Townley Grammar School, parents need to complete an online application form via their Local Authority (LA).

 

Parents are advised to contact the LA directly, rather than the school, with any specific admission questions.

 

Townley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Townley Grammar School eleven plus exam consists of two test papers that each last around 50 minutes. The two tests cover the following subjects:

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Numerical reasoning (maths)
  • Non-verbal reasoning

 

Each test contains a mixture of standard format and multiple-choice questions, divided into timed sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Townley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The key to preparing for the 11 Plus exam is organisation. The more time children have to study for the entrance tests, the better chance they’ll have of performing well. Parents should can support their child’s revision by creating a study timetable that maps out what days they will study and what topics they will cover.

 

In addition to working from a structured plan, we recommend using practice exam papers early in your child’s revision. Not only do practice tests help identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they help familiarise students with the layout of the exam and the types of questions they may be asked on test day.

 

As the exam draws closer, we’d recommend that your child takes our practice exam papers under exam conditions so that they get used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the Townley Grammar School 11+ exam:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)

11 Plus Cloze (CEM)

11 Plus Spelling (CEM)

 

11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about Townley Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Torquay Girls' Grammar School website

Founded in 1915, Torquay Girls’ Grammar School is a selective grammar that teaches over 800 girls, aged 11-18. In 2011, the school gained academy status, having previously been one of the first UK schools to achieve specialist status in humanities. The school consistently reports excellent exam results and is often placed in the top 20 state schools in the UK.

 

Alongside a packed curriculum, pupils are given the opportunity to participate in a broad extracurricular programme, which includes drama, dance and orienteering.

 

For an insight into life at Torquay Girls’, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Torquay Girls’ Grammar School

 

Address: Torquay Girls’ Grammar School, 30 Shiphay Lane, Torquay TQ2 7DY

County: Devon

Admissions Info: admin@tggsacademy.org, 01803 613215

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 858 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Dates: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Torquay Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Torquay Girls’ Grammar School is made through Torbay Council and all prospective Year 7 pupils must take the 11 Plus exam in the September before the year of entry.

 

As competition for Year 7 entry is high, the school is often oversubscribed. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children in care or adopted children
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium at the time of the test
  3. Children of staff working at the school at the time of the test
  4. A girl with a sister at the school
  5. By direct line distance from home to the school at the time of application

 

You can find more details about Torquay Girl’s admissions process via the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Torquay Girls’ Grammar School

 

 

To secure one of the 150 Year 7 places available at Torquay Girls’ Grammar, parents need to download the registration form from the school website.

 

Girls will sit the 11 Plus tests in September and parents will receive the results in mid-October. Places will be officially allocated in early March.

 

Torquay Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Torquay Girls’ Grammar School exam consists of two CEM test papers and one English writing test.

 

Girls will be tested on:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Numerical reasoning (maths)
  • Non-verbal reasoning

 

There will be two papers, each lasting approximately 45-50 minutes.

 

The English writing test will be set by Torquay Girls’ Grammar School in collaboration with the other Torbay grammar schools and it will be marked internally.

 

How to Prepare for the Torquay Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Preparing for the 11 Plus can sometimes feel overwhelming. However, with a carefully thought-out revision plan that focuses on studying ‘little and often’, students should find the process easily manageable.

 

Once a revision routine has been established, parents should start introducing practice exam papers into their daughter’s studying. Practice papers can help familiarise students with the layout of the exam and get them used to answering the types of questions they may be asked on the day.

 

To give your child the best chance of securing a Year 7 place at Torquay Girls’ Grammar School, we would recommend the following eleven plus practice tests:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Spelling (CEM)

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about Torquay Girls’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Torquay Boys' Grammar School website

Founded in 1904, Torquay Boys’ Grammar School is a selective school for boys aged 11-18. Over 1100 boys are taught at the school and girls aged 16-18 are accepted into the Sixth Form. Due to a significant growth in pupil numbers, the school has undergone an extensive building programme to ensure students enjoy good quality facilities.

 

One of the top 20 boys’ schools in the UK, Torquay Boys’ Grammar received academy status in 2010 and became a Multi-Academy Trust in 2012. The school provides a traditional curriculum that focuses on the qualities and skills young learners need to succeed in school and beyond.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Torquay Boys’ Grammar School

 

Address: Torquay Boys’ Grammar School, Shiphay Manor Drive, Torquay TQ2 7EL

County: Devon

Admissions Info: enquiries@tbgs.torbay.sch.uk, 01803 615501

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,120 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 156

Open Day Date: July and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Torquay Boys’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Torquay Boys’ Grammar is open to 156 pupils in Year 7. Admission to the school at this stage is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open events before applying.

 

In cases where there are more Year 7 applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Boys in care, or who were in care
  2. Boys who are eligible for the Pupil Premium
  3. Other boys

 

For further details about the school’s admission criteria at Year 7, please visit its website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Torquay Boys’ Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Torquay Boys’ Grammar, parents need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online.

 

Students that live in a different local authority from Torbay need to apply by contacting their LA directly.

 

Torquay Boys’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Torquay Boys’ Grammar School exam consists of two CEM test papers and one English writing test.

 

The CEM tests will assess verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning (maths) and non-verbal reasoning. There will be two papers, each with approximately 45-50 minutes of timed test questions.

 

The English writing test will be set by Torquay Boys’ Grammar School, in collaboration with the other Torbay grammar schools and it will be marked internally.

 

How to Prepare for the Torquay Boys’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Due to its formal nature, children can feel intimidated about sitting the eleven plus exam. To keep negative feelings at bay, parents should work with their child to build a good study plan so as to avoid leaving 11 Plus preparation to the last minute.

Introducing practice exam papers into your child’s study routine will prove beneficial as these will give your child a clearer idea of the structure of the exam. These practice papers should also be taken under timed conditions as this will get them used to working under time pressure as will be required in their CEM 11 Plus exam questions.

 

Our 11+ practice papers can help your child to prepare for the Torquay Boy’s Grammar school entrance exam. The following papers are an excellent resource for your child’s 11 Plus revision:

 

11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)

11 Plus Cloze (CEM)

11 Plus Spelling (CEM)

 

The information provided about Torquay Boys’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Tonbridge Grammar School website

Located in Kent, Tonbridge Grammar School is a girls-only school. Founded in 1905 with just 19 students, today Tonbridge educates over 1,000 girls aged from 11-18. Boys are accepted into the school’s Sixth Form from age 16. The school is based within a 14-acre campus in Deakin Leas, Tonbridge.

 

An International Baccalaureate World School, Tonbridge Grammar mixes a traditional curriculum with a passion for learning. The school aims to produce students who are keen to make a difference in the world.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Tonbridge Grammar School

 

Address: Tonbridge Grammar School, Deakin Leas, Tonbridge TN9 2JR

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@tgs.kent.sch.uk, 01732 365125

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,058 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Dates: June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL)

 

Tonbridge Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Tonbridge Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. To be considered for one of the 180 places available, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in this entrance exam.

 

The school encourages both parents and pupils to attend one of its open events before registering for a Year 7 place. The school holds monthly group tours from November to April and larger-scale open events in June and October. At these events, parents can ask any questions they might have about the school’s curriculum and learning environment.

 

In case of oversubscription, Tonbridge Grammar School gives priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children
  2. Children who meet the required score in the 11 Plus (135 Area places / 35 Governor places)
  3. Students who are eligible for Pupil Premium (10 places)

 

Visit Tonbridge Grammar School’s website for more information about its Year 7 admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Tonbridge Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Tonbridge Grammar School, parents must first register their daughter for the Kent Test. This can be done online via the Local Authority (LA), Kent County Council.

 

Once students have taken the Kent Test in September, parents will receive the results in October and must then submit a Secondary School Common Application Form (SCAF) via the LA’s website.

 

Tonbridge Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Along with the majority of selective grammar schools in Kent, Tonbridge Grammar uses the Kent Test at 11+ to allocate its 180 Year 7 places. The exam consists of tests in Reasoning, English and Maths and also includes a writing task.

 

The exam is divided as follows:

 

Part 1: Reasoning – A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three shorter sections and focuses on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.

Part 2: English and Maths – A one-hour exam that is split into two sections. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and 25-minute test. The English section will test comprehension and literacy skills, while the maths section is made up of multiple-choice questions.

Part 3: Writing – This 40-minute writing task will not be marked as part of the eleven plus test, but might be referred to in borderline or appeal cases.

 

How to Prepare for the Tonbridge Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is well-known as an extremely competitive grammar school area, so for your child to succeed in the Kent 11 Plus exam, they would do well to invest additional time into their revision ahead of the test date.

 

We always encourage students to revise ‘little and often’. Children who approach their revision sessions like this are much more likely to perform better in exams, compared with those who become overwhelmed by longer revision sessions.

 

As well as working from a structured revision schedule, we recommend using practice exam papers from an early stage. Practice papers enable parents to monitor their child’s learning from week-to-week and identify any strengths and weaknesses.

 

For students to have the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Tonbridge Grammar School, we would recommend starting with these practice test:

 

 

For additional subject-specific revision, we would suggest these practice exam papers:

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

Eleven Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

Eleven Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

Eleven Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

Eleven Plus Spelling (GL)

 

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

Eleven Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

The information provided about Tonbridge Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of The Harvey Grammar School website

The Harvey Grammar School (HGS) is a selective school for boys aged 11–18 and is located in Folkestone, Kent. Pupils are divided across four houses at HGS: Discovery, Endeavour, Resolution and Victory.

 

Over 800 boys are taught a broad and balanced curriculum that aims to challenge pupils throughout their school life. In recent years, the school has worked to build a range of modern facilities where pupils can participate in extracurricular activities, including music, drama productions, and sport.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Harvey Grammar School

 

Address: The Harvey Grammar School, Cheriton Road, Folkestone CT19 5JY

County: Kent

Admissions Info: enquiries@harveygs.kent.sch.uk, 01303 252131

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 882 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

The Harvey Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

The 150 Year 7 places at The Harvey Grammar School are allocated on the basis of student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. All admissions are dealt with by the Local Authority (LA) and, when parents are applying, they must do so directly with Kent County Council.

 

The Harvey Grammar School has fixed oversubscription criteria, which is implemented in the following priority order:

 

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Boys who reside in the District of Shepway
  3. Other boys who satisfy the selection requirements, with those living nearest to the school being given the higher priority

 

Should a student not receive a Year 7 place at The Harvey Grammar School, parents can appeal the decision. Our guide to grammar school appeals explains the process in more detail.

 

More information about The Harvey Grammar School’s admissions criteria is available on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Harvey Grammar School

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test at 11 Plus, parents must complete an online registration form.

 

Once candidates have sat the Kent Test at eleven plus, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. The Council will send assessment decisions to parents in October and offers will be sent out on National Offer Day in March of the following year.

 

For further information about The Harvey Grammar School’s admissions process for Year 7 entry, call the school on 01303 252131 or email at enquiries@harveygs.kent.sch.uk.

 

The Harvey Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

For Year 7 entry, The Harvey Grammar School uses the Kent 11 Plus exam. The Kent Exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with a separate answer sheet, split into the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Pupils will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
  3. A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases.

 

How to Prepare for The Harvey Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The Harvey Grammar School is generally oversubscribed in Year 7, so parents should make sure that their son makes the most of the time and resources available ahead of the exam.

 

Children at this age are likely to perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer period, rather than crammed in one or two sessions just before the test. Students that revise in short sessions over a longer period of time tend to retain knowledge better.

 

The Kent Test covers a number of subjects and we have created targeted resources to help with every aspect of the test. We would recommend using practice exam papers to prepare, as they will highlight any weaker areas early on. Practice papers are also a great way to monitor a student’s progress.

 

Pupils who are due to sit the Kent Test, with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at The Harvey Grammar School, will benefit from these resources:

 

 

If students need to work on a particular subject area, these practice papers will prove beneficial:

 

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

Eleven Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

Eleven Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

Eleven Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

Eleven Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

Eleven Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

Eleven Plus Spelling

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about The Harvey Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of The Folkestone School for Girls website

Founded in 1905, Folkestone School for Girls (FSG) is a girls’ grammar located in the Kent port town of Folkestone. An academy school, FSG teaches over 1,000 girls aged 11-18, who are split across six houses: Austen, Curie, Johnson, Lovelace, Pankhurst and Seacole.

 

FSG aims to provide its girls with a varied education, although its curriculum does focus on more traditional subjects. Away from the classroom, the school provides pupils with a range of extracurricular opportunities such as dance and drama productions, sporting events and a ‘young magistrates’ programme.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Folkestone School for Girls

 

Address: The Folkestone School for Girls, Coolinge Lane, Folkestone CT20 3RB

County: Kent

Admissions Info: 01303 251125

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,024 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Dates: June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

The Folkestone School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

As like many other selective grammar schools in Kent, Year 7 admission to The Folkestone School for Girls is determined by pupil performance in the Kent 11+ exam. There are currently 180 places allocated to Year 7 students. Prospective students and their parents are advised to attend one of the school’s open events; information on these events can be found on the school’s website.

 

In the case of oversubscription, The Folkestone School for Girls gives priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children who live in the District of Shepway
  3. Children who live closest to the school

 

Visit FSG’s website for more information about its Year 7 admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Folkestone School for Girls

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at The Folkestone School for Girls, parents must first register their daughter for the Kent Test, this is done via the Local Authority (LA), Kent County Council.

 

Once the child has sat the Kent Test in September, parents will receive the results in October and must then submit their Secondary School Common Application Form (SCAF), again via the LA’s website.

 

The Folkestone School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The majority of selective grammar schools in Kent use the Kent Test at eleven plus to allocate Year 7 places. The exam consists of tests in Reasoning, English and Maths, and also includes a writing task.

 

The format is broken down as follows:

 

Section 1 – Reasoning: A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is divided into three shorter sections that focus on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.

 

Section 2 – English and Maths: A one-hour exam that is split into two sections. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and 25-minute test. The English section will test comprehension and literacy skills, while the maths section will contain multiple choice questions.

 

Section 3 – Writing: This 40-minute writing task will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be referred to in borderline or appeal cases.

 

How to Prepare for The Folkestone School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is considered one of the most competitive grammar school areas in the UK. For students to have the best possible chance of gaining a Year 7 place, it’s advised to have a documented revision plan in place early on.

 

Students can maximise the time they have to revise by starting the process early and investing in the best resources available. It’s important to be organised and follow a clear revision strategy. In doing so, students will find the Kent Test much easier to understand.

 

Parents can monitor their child’s academic progress by choosing from our selection of online practice papers. The Kent Test at 11 Plus is focused on particular skills, so we would highly recommend the resources below, that have been specifically created for this test:

 

 

For additional subject-specific revision, we would also recommend these practice exam papers:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about The Folkestone School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of The Crypt School website

The Crypt School was founded in 1539 and is located in Gloucester. It became an academy in 2011 and, from 2018, it is fully coeducational. Over 800 pupils are divided across five houses: Brown, Henley, Moore, Raikes and Whitefield.

 

The school encourages its pupils to pursue their passions outside of the classroom through an impressive range of extracurricular activities.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Crypt School

 

Address: The Crypt School, Podsmead, Gloucester GL2 5AE

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: enquiries@crypt.gloucs.sch.uk, 01452 530291

School Type: Co-Educational (from 2018)

Number of pupils: 804 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Dates: March and June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)

 

The Crypt School 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at The Crypt School, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. The school’s admissions are centrally-coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council and parents who wish their child to sit the 11+ test for the school must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form.

 

With an average of five applications for every Year 7 place at The Crypt School, in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children eligible for Pupil Premium
  3. Children whose parents are members of staff at the school for at least two years
  4. All other children

 

For more information about The Crypt’s admission process at Year 7, visit the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Crypt School

 

The Crypt School uses the same eleven plus test from CEM (Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring) as the other grammar schools in Gloucestershire. For children to be considered for a Year 7 place at the school, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online via their Local Authority (LA), as well as a test registration form, available via the school’s website during the registration period.

 

To be considered for a place at The Crypt School, parents must include the school as one of their ranked choices on the CAF. Parents will receive results from the 11 Plus in October and the LA will send out official place allocations in March of the following year.

 

The Crypt School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Crypt School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam by University of Durham. This test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:

 

Both tests are taken on the same day and each last 45-50 minutes.

 

How to Prepare for The Crypt School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Students who are due to sit the 11 Plus exam at The Crypt School should create a thorough revision timetable well ahead of exam day. The more prepared children are ahead of the exam, the better chance they will have of achieving a good score.

 

Children may need to commit time to additional revision sessions alongside their usual homework. If students are struggling to get motivated, consider introducing fun revision games.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective preparation tool for The Crypt School eleven plus. These papers are an excellent way of improving time management skills. The more papers that a student takes, the more familiar  they will become with the types of questions they could be asked in the exam.

 

For The Crypt School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about The Crypt School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sutton Grammar School website

Sutton Grammar School is a selective grammar school for boys located in Sutton, South London. Girls are welcome to attend the school’s Sixth Form. Over 900 students aged 11-18 attend the school, which was founded in 1899.

 

The school challenges its pupils with a taxing curriculum, while encouraging its students to participate in a range of extracurricular activities, which include sport, music, drama, debate and a Combined Cadet Force.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sutton Grammar School

 

Address: Sutton Grammar School, Manor Lane, Sutton SM1 4AS

County: London (Borough of Sutton)

Admissions Info: office@suttongrammar.sutton.sch.uk, 020 8642 3821

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 930 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 135

Open Day Date: September

Exam Dates: September (part one) and October (part two)

Exam Board Type: Part One: Multiple-Choice Maths and English / Part Two: Open Answer Maths and English

 

Sutton Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Sutton Grammar School is part of Sutton’s Coordinated Admissions Scheme and, as such, admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET), similar to the standard 11 Plus exam. Competition for the 150 places available in Year 7 is very high, so the school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open events, which usually take place in September. At these events, you can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.

 

In the likely event of Sutton Grammar School being oversubscribed in Year 7, the school applies these policies, in this priority order:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after boys
  2. 75 places by rank order of the scores in the selection tests where the home address of the boy is in one of the postcodes (SM1-7, KT4, KT17, CR0 4–, CR4)
  3. 60 places (plus any remaining places in criterion 2 if the number of qualified boys in criterion 2 is less than the 75 on offer) by rank order of the scores in the selection tests from any home address
  4. Proximity of the boy’s home address from the school (where scores are equal)

 

Sutton Grammar School adheres to a strict admission policy in Year 7, so parents are advised to read the policy before applying for a place.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sutton Grammar School

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit the SET (part one) must complete a Supplementary Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open. Sutton Grammar School is part of the Pan-London Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme. To apply for a place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF) issued by their Local Authority. Those who live in London, or Surrey, can complete the CAF online.

 

If students are successful in the SET, they will be invited to sit Sutton Grammar’s Second Stage Entrance Examination. Should they pass this test, parents must include Sutton Grammar on the CAF for pupils to be eligible for consideration for a Year 7 place.

 

Sutton Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

In recent years, Sutton Grammar School’s eleven plus tests have been split into two stages:

 

  • Stage 1: Maths and English, both multiple-choice and each last approximately 45 minutes.

 

This SET is run in conjunction with other local schools in Sutton. The result of the SET determines whether or not a boy is eligible for the second stage test.

 

  • Stage 2: English and Mathematics – the English test is an extended writing task to test comprehension skills, while the maths test is based on the KS2 curriculum and is a standard format. Both tests last 40-45 minutes.

 

How to Prepare for the Sutton Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The five selective grammar schools in Sutton are particularly cautious when it comes to revealing information about their selection examinations. Because of this, and the extensive competition for places in Year 7, both children and parents can experience anxiety and stress ahead of the tests.

 

However, with the help of Exam Papers Plus, parents can give their son the best possible chance of securing a Year 7 place at Sutton Grammar School. By creating a revision plan early and introducing online practice papers, parents can identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.

 

Sutton Grammar School has reported that there are over 10 applications for each Year 7 place, so for students to get ahead of the competition, we would recommend using the following practice tests, which have been specifically designed to help students prepare for the Selective Eligibility Test:

 

Round 1 (S.E.T)

 

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4

 

For further subject-specific practice, we would recommend the following:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

Round 2

 

For Round 2, we would recommend the following packs:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

The information provided about Sutton Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls website

Founded in 1929, Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls is based in Sutton Coldfield in the West Midlands. It became an academy in 2011, after previously being awarded specialist science status in 2004 and being recognised as a Beacon School.

 

Sutton Girls is a partner school to Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School, with the two schools partnering through the year in events such as drama performances and music productions.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls

 

Address: Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls, Jockey Road, Sutton Coldfield B73 5PT

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: enquiry@suttcold.bham.sch.uk, 0121 354 1479

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 991 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls is a member of The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. This body sets the admission criteria in the West Midlands. Admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam.

 

As per all grammar schools in Birmingham, prospective Year 7 students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. Pupils must achieve the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam to be considered for a place.

 

Parents should be aware that due to oversubscription, not every girl who achieves the qualifying score can be offered a place. In the likely event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria to assign places, in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Students eligible for Pupil Premium
  3. Those who live closest to the school

 

Find out more about the school’s Year 7 admissions policy via its website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls, parents must first register their daughter with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium.

 

Secondly, parents should complete a Local Authority (LA) preference form. On the form, parents should select up to six preferred schools. It is the responsibility of the LA to consider each application.

 

The local LA will send out 11 Plus test results in October and official places will be allocated in early March the following year.

 

Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Girls will sit two papers that each last approximately 45 minutes. The papers cover the following subjects:

 

 

Girls are required to write their answers in the test booklets and most of the questions will be multiple choice.

 

How to Prepare for the Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls is consistently oversubscribed for Year 7 entry. Due to this competition for places, students need to be fully prepared for the 11 Plus exam in order to have a chance of gaining a place.

 

An 11 Plus revision plan is key and should be implemented well ahead of the actual exam day. To prepare for the eleven plus exam, students should make use practice test papers. The CEM 11 Plus exam challenges pupils to answer questions quickly, so in order to complete the papers within the allocated time, children usually need to improve their time management skills. This is just one of the many benefits of using practice exam papers.

 

To gives students the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Stroud High School website

Founded in 1904, Gloucestershire-based Stroud High School (SHS) is a girls-only grammar school, catering for pupils aged 11-18. In July 2011, the school became an academy and, since then, its buildings have undergone a large programme of modernisation.

 

Almost 900 girls are split across five houses at SHS: Arundale, Capel, Griffin, Kimmin and Stanley. These houses are named after mills in the Stroud valleys. The school offers its pupils a range of extracurricular clubs and societies, catering for interests in music, academia and sport.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Stroud High School

 

Address: Stroud High School, Beards Lane, Cainscross Road, Stroud GL5 4HF

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: admin@stroudhigh.gloucs.sch.uk, 01453 764441

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 871 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: April, June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)

 

Stroud High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Stroud High School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 150 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open events, which take place at key times in the academic year. More information about the admissions process is provided on the night and students will have the opportunity to meet with staff.

 

Once pupils have taken the entrance exam, an application needs to be made through the local authority’s application system. In most cases, applications can be made online through the local authority’s website.

 

SHS has an average of three applications for every place at Year 7, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to:

 

  1. Children in Public Care
  2. Students from families entitled to Pupil Premium
  3. Rank order from the admissions test

 

To find out more about SHS’s admissions process, please visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Stroud High School

 

Stroud High School’s Year 7 admissions are coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council. Parents who wish their daughter to sit the eleven plus test must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open.

 

In order to be considered for a place at Stroud High School, parents or guardians must complete the Local Authority (LA) Common Application Form (CAF), which should be submitted to the LA by the published closing date. You can get full details of this process online or call the LA on 01452 425000.

 

Parents will receive results of the 11+ test in October and if students meet the qualifying standard, they can apply for a Year 7 place at SHS.

 

Stroud High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Stroud High School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam created by University of Durham. This test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:

 

 

Each test takes around an hour to complete, which includes instructions and some worked examples at the beginning. The tests themselves are around 45 to 50 minutes. Both tests are taken on the same day and there is a 20-minute break between the papers.

 

How to Prepare for the Stroud High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Stroud High School is a popular grammar school in Gloucestershire, so it’s of little surprise that in Year 7, children should prepare for the 11 Plus exam well ahead of exam day.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective tool for preparation for the Stroud High School 11 Plus. The earlier students start with these practice papers, the sooner they will be aware of any subject areas that need additional work. The papers not only familiarise students with the layout of the 11+ exam, but also help them to improve their time management skills.

 

For the Stroud High School eleven plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Stroud High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Tiffin School website

Founded in 1880, Tiffin School is a selective boys’ grammar located in Kingston upon Thames in southwest London. Previously voluntary aided, Tiffin School became an academy in 2011 and has specialist status in both performing arts and languages.

 

With a traditional heritage, Tiffin prides itself on being a forward-thinking, progressive school that prepares its pupils for modern life. Boys are able to participate in a range of extracurricular activities including sport, musicals and art.

 

For an insight into life at Tiffin School, take a look at this short video, showcasing a day in the life of new pupils:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Tiffin School

 

Address: Tiffin School, Queen Elizabeth Road, Kingston upon Thames KT2 6RL

County: London

Admissions Info: office@tiffin.kingston.sch.uk, 020 8546 4638

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,059 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: October and November

Exam Board Type: Stage 1: ( Multiple-choice Maths and English), Stage 2: (Open answer Maths and English)

 

Tiffin School 11 Plus Admissions

 

With 180 places available in Year 7, the Tiffin School encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open evening, which usually takes place in July. At the open evenings, you can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff. Admission is determined by pupil performance in a two-stage entrance exam process, which is administered by Kingston Local Education Authority (LEA).

 

Competition for places in Year 7 at Tiffin School is high, so in the likely event of oversubscription, the school applies the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Boys with an education, health and care (EHC) plan or a Statement of Special Educational Needs
  2. Boys whose permanent place of residence is within the school’s Priority Area
  3. Boys whose permanent place of residence is outside the Priority Area

 

For details about the school’s Priority Area and further information about its admissions criteria, visit the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Tiffin School

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit Stage One of the entrance exam must complete an online registration form. This can be done via the school’s website when the registration window is open. Boys who pass this stage will be invited to sit Stage Two of the test, set by the school in November. At this stage, parents must complete their Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) for their child to be eligible for consideration for a place at Tiffin School.

 

Parents will receive notification of places in March the following year via post.

 

Tiffin School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Parents are advised to refer to Tiffin School’s FAQ document for more detailed information about the 11 Plus exam format. In previous years, the tests have been split into two stages:

 

Stage One: English and Maths, both multiple choice

 

A number of pupils will then be invited back to sit the Stage Two test.

 

Stage Two: English and Maths, set by the school. Although no details are given ahead of the test by the school, previous tests have included comprehension, a writing task and standard format maths questions.

 

How to Prepare for the Tiffin School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Tiffin School chooses not to reveal details of its exam provider for Year 7 testing. Understandably, this can cause concern among parents and students who are keen to prepare for the exam. At Exam Papers Plus, we have resources that can help students prepare for the Tiffin School 11 Plus tests. Our practice papers can help you identify any weaknesses or gaps in your child’s preparation. This will enable you to adjust your child’s study schedule accordingly.

 

Tiffin School is a hugely competitive grammar school, with over ten applicants for every Year 7 place, so students need to be properly prepared before the exam. To give students the best possible chance of gaining a place in Year 7 at Tiffin School, we would recommend using the following practice papers:

 

STAGE 1

 

11 Plus English Pack 1

11 Plus English Pack 2

11 Plus English Pack 3

11 Plus Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving

 

STAGE 2

 

11 Plus English 1 (Open answer)

11 Plus English 2 (Open answer)

 

11 Plus Maths 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Maths 2 (Open Answer)

 

The information provided about Tiffin School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of The Skinners' School website

The Skinners’ School is a boys-only selective grammar school based in Royal Tunbridge Wells, Kent. Founded in 1887, Skinners’ has specialist status in both science and mathematics.

 

With over 1,000 boys at the school, Skinners’ provides a challenging curriculum while encouraging students to participate in co-curricular and extracurricular activities, such as joining the Combined Cadet Force, participating in sport, music and drama productions.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Skinners’ School

 

Address: The Skinners’ School, St John’s Road, Tunbridge Wells TN4 9PG

County: Kent

Admissions Info: enquiries@skinners-school.org.uk, 01892 520 732

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,021 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam

 

The Skinners’ School 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Skinners’ School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. With 150 Year 7 places available, the school uses its oversubscription criteria when there are more applicants than places. The school gives priority to:

 

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Children eligible for Free School Meals (up to 10 places)
  3. Applicants ranked according to their combined test scores
  4. In case of a tie, preference will be given to the boy who lives closest to the school

 

The school’s website offers further information about the admissions process at The Skinners’.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Skinners’ School

 

The Skinners’ School Year 7 admissions are coordinated by Kent County Council, the Local Authority (LA). To register for the Kent Test at eleven plus, parents must first complete an online registration form.

 

Once students have taken the Kent Test at 11+, parents need to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it online to Kent County Council. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the Council in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March the following year.

 

The Skinners’ School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

As per the majority of Kent-based selective schools, The Skinners’ School requires pupils to take the Kent 11+ exam, which consists of two multiple-choice tests with a separate answer sheet.

 

The first test is one hour long and is split into two sections, English and maths. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

The second test is a reasoning paper and is split into three sections:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning
  • Spatial reasoning

 

Prospective pupils will also be required to sit a 40-minute writing task. Although this task isn’t marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, it could be used in appeal cases, borderline cases or at a Headteacher’s request.

 

How to Prepare for The Skinners’ School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The Kent Test tends to vary from year to year, but children can maximise their chances of gaining a place at their preferred secondary school by preparing well. When to begin preparation will depend on your child’s current attainment, but all children will benefit from regular practice sessions.

 

For The Skinners’ School eleven plus test, we’d recommend using practice exam papers in study sessions. Practice papers give pupils an idea of the types of questions they can expect in the real exam, and can provide parents with a good indication of their child’s current abilities.

 

Gaining a Year 7 place at a Kent grammar school can be challenging. Therefore, we have specifically designed the following practice tests to give students an idea of what they can expect in the exam:

 

 

For additional subject-specific revision, we also recommend these practice exam papers:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about The Skinners’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of The Rochester Grammar School website

Founded in 1888, Rochester Grammar School is a girls’ grammar school with academy status. The lead school in the Thinking School Academy Trust, Rochester Grammar is a modern establishment that aims to provide its pupils will an excellent academic education and prepare them for life beyond their time at the school.

 

Rochester Grammar has high expectations of its pupils and, in return, aims to build their confidence by encouraging them to be independent, critical thinkers.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Rochester Grammar School

 

Address: The Rochester Grammar School, Maidstone Road, Rochester ME1 3BY

County: Kent – Medway

Admissions Info: office@rochestergrammar.medway.sch.uk, 01634 843 049

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,116 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 175

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus

 

The Rochester Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

With 175 places available in Year 7, each place is determined by pupil performance in the eleven plus exam. Prior to applying for a place, parents are advised to attend the school’s open event to get more information about the admissions process.

 

The Medway Test is used by Medway grammar schools (including Rochester Grammar) and children who attend a primary school in the area will take the 11 Plus exam at their current school. Those living outside of the area will take the exam in an independent test centre.

 

In the event of oversubscription, Rochester Grammar will apply the following criteria, in this priority order:

 

  1. Children in public care
  2. Children who can demonstrate a specific musical aptitude (two places only)
  3. In rank order, based on the scores achieved in the tests

 

Get more details about Rochester Grammar School’s admissions process.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Rochester Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Rochester Grammar School, parents are required to complete a Common Application Form (CAF), as administered by the Medway local authority. All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about the registration process.

 

Alternatively, parents can call the admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 with any Year 7 application questions.

 

The Rochester Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Rochester Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

 

Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple-choice and last around 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and last 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

Previously in the Medway Test, the 11 Plus Maths and writing sections have been double-weighted in comparison to the Verbal Reasoning. This means the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the Verbal Reasoning score.

 

How to Prepare for The Rochester Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

To keep stress levels to a minimum, we would always advise parents to plan ahead and use relevant practice resources. 11 Plus preparation should start as early as possible, as leaving it until the last minute can cause unnecessary anxiety for both children and parents.

 

Parents should encourage their daughters to complete 11 Plus practice papers under timed conditions for the Medway Test, to get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For the Rochester Grammar School eleven plus exam, we would recommend the following resources:

 

11 Plus CEM Verbal Reasoning

11 Plus CEM Comprehension

11 Plus CEM Cloze

11 Plus CEM Spelling

 

11 Plus CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11 Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11 Plus CEM M.C Numerical Reasoning

 

The information provided about The Rochester Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Norton Knatchbull School website

Located in Ashford, Kent, The Norton Knatchbull School is a selective boys’ grammar school with academy status. Girls aged 16-18 are accepted into the school’s Sixth Form. Although founded in 1630 by Norton Knatchbull, it was known as ‘Ashford Grammar School’ until 1973.

 

With specialisms in languages and science, the school consistently produces good examination results. It also offers pupils a wide extracurricular programme and encourages them to participate in the local community.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Norton Knatchbull School

 

Address: The Norton Knatchbull School, Hythe Road, Ashford TN24 0QJ

County: Kent

Admissions Info: information@nks.kent.sch.uk, 01233 620045

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,097

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam

 

The Norton Knatchbull School 11 Plus Admissions

 

The 180 Year 7 places at Norton Knatchbull School are allocated on the basis of student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. Admissions are dealt with by the Local Authority (LA) and, when parents apply, they must do so directly with Kent County Council.

 

If the school receives more applications than there are places, it will implement the following oversubscription criteria, in the following priority order:

 

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Children with siblings at the school when the child starts
  3. Health and Special Access Reasons
  4. Proximity of a child’s home to the school

 

For more information about Norton Knatchbull School’s admissions criteria, visit the website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Norton Knatchbull School

 

All applications for Year 7 places at Norton Knatchbull School must go through the LA, Kent County Council. Parents must complete the LA’s Common Application Form (CAF), which can be done online.

 

The LA coordinates all Year 7 places, not the school, so parents are advised to contact the LA directly with any specific registration questions.

 

The Norton Knatchbull School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

To be considered for one of the Norton Knatchbull School’s 180 places at Year 7, children must reach the required standard in the Kent 11 Plus test. This test is standard across the county of Kent and most selective grammar schools in the area adhere to it.

 

The Kent eleven plus exam is split into three sections:

 

  • Section 1 focuses on English and maths. Both topics have a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test. The test is multiple-choice and is an hour long overall.
  • Section 2 tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning. A multiple-choice test, it is an hour long in total.
  • Section 3 is a writing task that lasts for 40 minutes. This is not marked as part of the overall 11+ score, but can be referred to in borderline cases or appeals.

 

How to Prepare for The Norton Knatchbull School 11 Plus Exam?

 

For boys to succeed in gaining a place at The Norton Knatchbull School, they will need a structured study plan. The Kent Test’s English section requires good comprehension skills, so parents should encourage their son to read a range of texts – this reading list for 11 Plus level is a good starting point.

 

Our online practice exam papers will give students the best chance of success in the Kent 11 Plus test, with a view to gaining a Year 7 place at Norton Knatchbull.

 

We would particularly recommend these practice tests that have been specifically designed to help students prepare for the Kent 11 Plus exam:

 

 

For further subject-specific revision, these practice papers will prove beneficial:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about The Norton Knatchbull School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the North Halifax Grammar School website

North Halifax Grammar School is a co-educational state grammar and science college that was founded in 1985. Based in Illingworth, Halifax, the school has academy status, which has helped to fund the refurbishment of its facilities.

 

The school’s commitment to its students’ academic and personal development is reflected in its motto, ‘Living to Learn, Learning to Live’. The school aims to develop pupils’ self-confidence and help them to fulfil their educational potential.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for North Halifax Grammar School

 

Address: The North Halifax Grammar School, Moorbottom Road, Illingworth, Halifax HX2 9SU

County: Yorkshire (Calderdale)

Admissions Info: mail@nhgs.co.uk, 01422 244625

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,142 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Calderdale 11 Plus

 

North Halifax Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Alongside Crossley Heath Grammar School, North Halifax Grammar School complies with Calderdale Council’s admissions process in Yorkshire. In order to be considered for one of the 180 places at NHGS in Year 7, pupils must pass the eleven plus exam.

 

Parents and prospective pupils are advised to attend the school’s open event ahead of applying. At this event, school staff will go into more detail about the admission process and parents will also have the opportunity to ask questions and take a tour of the school’s facilities.

 

If the school receives more applications than there are places available, it will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children entitled to Pupil Premium
  3. Children with siblings attending the school at the time of admission
  4. Proximity of the child’s home to the school, with those living closest given highest priority

 

Get more information about North Halifax Grammar School’s admission criteria.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to North Halifax Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at North Halifax Grammar School, parents must register their child via the Halifax Grammar Schools’ website. Students will take the school entrance test in September and parents will receive the results from the admissions test in October.

 

If a pupil has been offered a place at North Halifax Grammar School, parents must submit the Online Common Application Form (CAF) to Calderdale Local Authority by late October and include the school as one of their preferences to be considered for a place.

 

North Halifax Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

North Halifax Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

  1. An English test
  2. A mathematics test
  3. A verbal reasoning test

 

The English paper lasts an hour and is split into reading and writing sections. The maths test consists of 40 questions in multiple choice format and lasts 30 minutes, while the 30-minute verbal reasoning paper consists of 50 multiple choice questions.

 

The scores for each test will be age-weighted.

 

How to Prepare for North Halifax Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

To succeed at the eleven plus stage, students need to be organised well ahead of the exam. Keep stress levels to a minimum by creating a thorough revision timetable. Our 11 Plus guide for parents provides an overview of the exam and what to expect of the process.

 

Encourage your child to start revising early to ensure that they have plenty of time to work on their weaker subject areas. Students should use practice test papers to familiarise themselves with the layout of the exam and to improve their time management skills.

 

For the North Halifax Grammar School eleven plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following practice resources:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

The information provided about North Halifax Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Stretford Grammar School website

Founded in 1928, Stretford Grammar School is a co-educational grammar based in Stretford, Trafford. The school places particular emphasis on encouraging self-discipline by providing a supportive and caring environment.

 

Stretford Grammar achieved Science College status in 2005 and has since gained specialist status in mathematics too. The school encourages its pupils to take part in a range of extracurricular activities and to actively participate in their local community.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Stretford Grammar School

 

Address: Stretford Grammar School, Granby Road, Stretford, Manchester M32 8JB

County: Trafford (Greater Manchester)

Admissions Info: admin@stretfordgrammar.com, 0161 865 2293

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 758 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 128

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Stretford Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Since 2016, Stretford Grammar School has been a member of the Trafford Grammar Schools CEM Consortium. All four schools in the Consortium use the same eleven plus test and admission to Stretford is determined by pupil performance in the exam.

 

Parents are encouraged to attend the school’s open event in June, to ensure that Stretford Grammar is the best learning environment for their child.

 

In recent years, Stretford Grammar School has been consistently oversubscribed. In such cases, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children.
  2. Children eligible for Pupil Premium (up to 10 places will be allocated to the highest performing candidates who qualify at the time of allocation, irrespective of distance).
  3. Children who will have a sibling attending the school at the time of admission.
  4. The top 20 scoring candidates, irrespective of home residence, will be allocated a place.
  5. Children who live nearest to the school, measured in a direct straight line from the child’s permanent place of residence to the school.

 

Find out more about the school’s admissions policy via its website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Stretford Grammar School

 

In order to apply for a place at Stretford Grammar, parents must register their child for the school’s entrance examination.

 

In addition to completing the online registration form, parents also need to complete a Local Authority (LA) Common Preference Form. To be considered for a place at Stretford Grammar School, the school itself must be explicitly chosen as one of your preferences on the Preference form.

 

Stretford Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The eleven plus exam at Stretford Grammar School consists of two test papers, which cover:

Each paper lasts approximately one hour and contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions.

 

For your child to be in with a chance of gaining a place at the school, they will need a qualifying score of 334. Please note however, that a qualifying score does not guarantee your child a place at the school.

 

How to Prepare for the Stretford Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

For many children, the 11 plus exam will be their first experience of studying for an important test. As a parent, you can help your child prepare in the first instance by reading our guide to studying for the eleven plus exam.

 

Additionally, you can learn more about the required subject areas in these articles:

 

 

As your child’s revision progresses, you can use 11+ practice tests to monitor their progress. Encourage your child to complete these tests under timed conditions to get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For the Stretford Grammar School 11 Plus, we specifically recommend the following practice resources that will help develop your child’s abilities and provide great practice ahead of their exams:

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

Eleven Plus Comprehension (CEM)

Eleven Plus Cloze (CEM)

Eleven Plus Spelling (CEM)

 

Eleven Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

Eleven Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

Eleven Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about Stretford Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the St. Olave's Grammar School

Located in Orpington, Greater London, St Olave’s Grammar School is a selective school for boys aged 11-18. Since 1998, girls aged 16-18 have been accepted into its Sixth Form. Founded in 1571, St. Olave’s was judged as an ‘Outstanding’ school by Ofsted in 2014 and prides itself on offering a wide curriculum to its pupils.

 

Consistently reported as one of the top achieving grammar schools in the UK, St. Olave’s actively encourages its pupils to participate fully in a variety of extracurricular activities alongside their academic work.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for St. Olave’s Grammar School

 

Address: St. Olave’s Grammar School, Goddington Lane, Orpington BR6 9SH

County: Bromley (London)

Admissions Info: office@saintolaves.net, 01689 820101

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 960 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 124

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: Stage 1 – September / Stage 2 – November

Exam Board Type: Set by school (Selective Eligibility Test – SET)

 

St. Olave’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to St. Olave’s in Year 7 is by academic selection, via an 11 Plus exam. Due to the school’s popularity, it is regularly oversubscribed, with an average of eight applications for every one Year 7 place. Parents are encouraged to attend the school’s open morning in June to ensure that the school can provide an appropriate learning environment for their child before applying for a place.

 

On completion of the eleven plus exam, the school will rank candidates and give the highest priority to those with special educational needs as well as previously looked after children. All boys must meet the school’s required academic criteria to be considered for a Year 7 place.

 

To learn more about St. Olave’s Year 7 admissions process, please visit the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St. Olave’s Grammar School

 

St. Olave’s participates in the coordinated admissions process operated by the London Borough of Bromley. For your child to be registered for the selection test and to be considered for a Year 7 place, parents must complete two forms:

 

  1. The Local Authority’s (LA) online application form. Parents must include St. Olave’s in their order of preference.
  2. St. Olave’s online Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which registers their son to sit the SET. The SIF must be submitted by the school’s published deadline.

 

Places are offered by your LA on National Offer Day in March.

 

St. Olave’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

St. Olave’s operates a two-stage process for their 11 Plus testing:

 

Stage 1

 

Boys are required to sit the school’s Selective Eligibility Test (SET). This multiple-choice test is made up of English comprehension, mathematics, verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions.

 

Stage 2

 

Pupils who pass the SET will then be invited to sit the school’s second stage tests in English and mathematics.

 

  • English – this hour-long, multiple choice test covers comprehension and a creative writing exercise or essay.
  • Mathematics – this hour-long test consists of a range of standard format questions of varying difficulty.

 

Following Stage 2, all scores will be standardised and aggregated, together with the SET marks, to allow a ranking of candidates. The first 124 pupils in rank order will be offered places at St/ Olave’s. Should there be a tie, the final rank order will be determined using performance in the mathematics paper, then the creative writing, then the English multiple choice and finally the SET.

 

How to Prepare for the St. Olave’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

St. Olave’s Grammar School consistently performs well in the UK’s grammar school league tables. It’s of little surprise that competition for Year 7 places is very strong. In setting its own 11+ tests, St. Olave’s aims to challenge prospective pupils. Boys must be academically strong if they are to gain one of the 124 Year 7 places.

 

Following a solid 11 Plus study plan will help your son approach the exam calmly as he’ll feel more confident in his answers. Start your son’s revision plan early and include online practice papers to help identify any weaker areas that require additional attention.

 

To put your son ahead of the competition at St. Olave’s, we would specifically recommend using the following practice papers, which are relevant for both stages of the exam:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

11 Plus Maths (Open Answer)

11 Plus Maths (Open Answer)

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 3

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 1

 

The information provided about St. Olave’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the St Ambrose College website

Located in the village of Hale Barns in Trafford’s Altrincham area, St Ambrose College is a Catholic grammar school for boys aged 11-18. Founded in 1946, the school was completely re-built after gaining academy status in 2012.

 

Both pupils and the local community are able to use the school’s facilities, including the swimming pool, sports hall and gym. Sport is central to the school’s extracurricular activities, although pupils also enjoy drama and music too.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for St Ambrose College

 

Address: St Ambrose College, Wicker Lane, Hale Barns, Altrincham WA15 0HE

County: Greater Manchester – Trafford

Admissions Info: admissions@st-ambrosecollege.org.uk, 0161 980 2711

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 950 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 140

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

St Ambrose College 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are currently 140 places allocated to Year 7 pupils at St Ambrose College. Each place allocation is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Both parents and prospective pupils can attend the College’s open morning in July, which will allow them to learn more about the admissions process and take a tour of the school ahead of applying for a place.

 

St Ambrose College is a popular school and it is likely that there will be more Year 7 applications than available places. Should this be the case, the College applies the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Baptised, Roman Catholic boys who are designated ‘looked after children’ or ‘previously looked after children’.
  2. Baptised, Roman Catholic boys who have a brother attending the school.
  3. Baptised, Roman Catholic boys whose home postcode falls within a nominated Local Pastoral Area.
  4. Baptised Roman Catholic boys.
  5. Other boys who are designated ‘looked after children’ or ‘previously looked after children’.
  6. Baptised, Christian boys who have a brother attending the school.
  7. Baptised, Christian boys in other Christian denominations supported by a minister’s reference confirming that they are a full and active member of the Church.
  8. Other boys in other Christian denominations supported by a minister’s reference confirming that they are a full and active member of the Church.
  9. Other boys

 

For more information about St Ambrose College’s admission process, or to find further details about its local pastoral area, please visit its website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Ambrose College

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit the entrance tests must do so before the exam date. The First Year application can be done online when registration is open.

 

Secondly, parents must complete their Local Authority’s (LA) Common Preference Form and return it to their LA before the designated closing date. St Ambrose College should be marked as a preference on this form.

 

St Ambrose College 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The St Ambrose College 11+ entrance exam consists of three parts

 

These papers are multiple choice and are set by GL Assessment. Parents will be notified of the test results in October, which will indicate whether the student has attained the required score to be eligible for admission. However, place allocations will not be made public until March the following year and passing the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of entry to the school.

 

How to Prepare for the St Ambrose College 11 Plus Exam?

 

Preparation is key when it comes to your son’s eleven plus exam. To give him the best chance of performing well and gaining a Year 7 place at St Ambrose College, you should ensure that 11+ practice papers form an integral part of his revision sessions. Regular use of these papers could increase your son’s chance of achieving the required score in the exam.

 

These papers will also help you to identify any gaps in your son’s knowledge well ahead of the exam as they cover the full syllabus range. You can allocate any additional time to his weaker areas plan and focus on the best revision techniques that work for your son’s learning style.

 

For the St Ambrose College 11 Plus, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving

 

11 Plus English Pack 1

11 Plus English Pack 2

11 Plus English Pack 3

11 Plus Spelling

 

The information provided about St Ambrose College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Photo of desks in a classroom

Mock exams are a good opportunity to reduce any anxiety your child might have about sitting the SATs tests in Year 6 of primary school. Often, these mock exams can be organised by SATs tutors and can offer a range of benefits to your child in the lead-up to the exam itself. In this article, we look at why sitting a SATs mock exam might be a good idea for your child.

 

Help to Understand Exam Structure

 

Mock exams can be set out in the same way as the real SATs exams, including sample questions that are similar to those that could be asked in the real test. While children might be confident in their knowledge of particular subjects, putting that into
practice in the exam room is definitely worth practicing.
Mock tests are very useful for showing your child what to expect from the SATs exam format and will put them at an advantage come SATs testing day.

 

Experience Test Conditions

 

Photo of desks in an exam room

 

The Key Stage 2 SATs may be one of the first times that your child experiences formal class test conditions. For Year 6 children, this can be a little unnerving and can sometimes result in unnecessary worry ahead of the exam.
Sitting a SATs mock exam can help your child become more familiar with this formal environment, without the pressure of it being the actual exam. Mock exams can provide children with reassurance and help to calm their nerves.

 

Improve Time Management


Similar to practice exam papers, mock exams are a great way of improving your child’s time management. Although the SATs are relatively short time-wise, children must be able to read texts and answer questions quickly and confidently before moving on to the next one immediately after.

 

By sitting a SATs mock exam, children can learn to manage their time more effectively, giving them a better chance of answering all the questions in the test, rather than potentially missing out on marks for unanswered questions.

 

Highlight Any Weaknesses

 

It’s unrealistic to expect children to be strong across all SATs subjects. The majority will most likely be stronger in some than others. Mock exams will identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses both in their subject knowledge and/or their exam technique.

 

Having your child take mock exams will help you gauge their progress and identify any areas that need to be improved. This will enable your child’s revision to be more focused and targeted in the final run-up to their SATs.

 

Boost Confidence

 

Photo of someone writing in a notepad

 

When your child has committed to their SATs revision and has shown progress through practice exam papers, mock exams can be an excellent way of boosting their confidence ahead of the real SATs exam.

 

If your child performs well and gains a good result in the mock test, they will recognise that their hard work is paying off and as a result, their confidence will be higher come exam day.

 

Practical Ways to Prepare for a Mock SATs Exam

 

Your child’s preparation for their mock exam should be no different to their preparation for Year 6 SATs. By the time they take the mock test, they should have been following a study plan and using SATs practice resources regularly. We would recommend the following practical tips for preparing for both mock SATs exams and the real SATs exam:

 

  • Your child should get plenty of rest the night before the test.
  • Ensure your child has a healthy, energy-packed breakfast on the morning of the exam.
  • Pack any SAT materials required for the exam the night before, to avoid stress in the morning.

 

Related posts:

SATs Prep Materials: What You Need

SATs Exam Preparation Tips and Strategies

 

Image sources:

https://www.pexels.com/photo/chairs-classroom-college-desks-289740/

https://www.pexels.com/photo/adult-blur-business-close-up-239548/

https://www.flickr.com/photos/patrick_q/2447140827/

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the St Bernard's Catholic Grammar School website

St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School is the only co-educational Catholic grammar school in England. Located in Langley, Berkshire, St Bernard’s was founded in 1897 and continues to promote a spiritual life through worship and prayer.

 

Over 800 pupils are divided across four houses at St Bernard’s. The houses – Annay, Clairvaux, Cîteaux and La Plaine – are named after monastic houses that all relate to the school’s history. The school is deemed ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted and achieves excellent academic results.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School

 

Address: St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School, 1 Langley Road, Slough SL3 7AF

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: 01753 527 020

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 841 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: May and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are currently 120 Year 7 places available at St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School and admission is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Admissions to St Bernard’s are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools and parents must register online ahead of their child’s eleven plus exam date.

 

In cases of oversubscription, the school will adhere to the following criteria, in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after children who are Catholic
  2. Practising Catholic children
  3. Catholic children
  4. All other looked after children
  5. Practising Orthodox children
  6. Orthodox children
  7. Children of Staff
  8. Practising Other Christian children
  9. Other Christian children
  10. Practising members of other faiths
  11. Members of other faiths
  12. Any other children

 

Parents should note that the school’s Governing Body will give priority to baptised Roman Catholic children who have a written reference from their Roman Catholic priest.
For more details on St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School’s admission criteria, please consult its most recent admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School, in the first instance, parents need to register their child with the Slough Consortium. Parents then need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF), which can be done online via the Slough County Council website.

 

As St Bernard’s follows Slough Consortium’s schedule for Year 7 place allocation, parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure their child is registered in time for the 11+ exam.

 

St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 60-65 minutes. All schools within the Slough Consortium take the same papers, which cover a mix of questions that test Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning.

 

Parents will receive online results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October, before the deadline for submission of the CAF. All results are fully age standardised and this is the score parents will receive.

 

How to Prepare for the St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

It’s likely that your child will have very little experience of sitting a formal examination, so they may have some nerves in the build-up to the 11+. With this in mind, it’s important to put a good study plan in place well ahead of exam day to keep any anxiety to a minimum. Try not to leave your child’s 11 Plus preparation until the last minute; set aside time every day for your child to revise. Research has shown that just 20 minutes of focused revision every day can make a difference to a child’s understanding of subjects and key concepts.

 

We would also recommend introducing practice exam papers into your child’s study routine early on, as these will give your child a clearer idea of the style of the exam. Encourage your child to take these practice papers under timed conditions in order to get them used to answering questions quickly. Creating a ‘mock exam’ environment will be excellent practice for the actual exam at St Bernard’s.

 

Our 11+ practice papers can help your child to prepare for the St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School exam. The following papers should be integrated into your child’s 11 Plus revision:

 

11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)

11 Plus Cloze (CEM)

11 Plus Spelling (CEM)

 

The information provided about St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Spalding High School website

Located in Lincolnshire, Spalding High School is a selective girls’ grammar founded in 1920. Almost 1,000 pupils attend the school, with boys aged 16-18 eligible for its Sixth Form.

 

Girls are divided across five houses from Year 7 upwards, with each house named after well-known women of historic importance: Curie, Johnson, Nightingale, Pankhurst and Sharman. Spalding High offers its pupils a well-rounded education and uses a variety of teaching methods in an effort to get the very best from its girls. The school also has a strong reputation for sporting achievements, and received sports college status in 2003.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Spalding High School

 

Address: Spalding High School, Stonegate, Spalding PE11 2PJ

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: jayne.knight@spaldinghigh.lincs.sch.uk, 01775 722110

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 989 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Spalding High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Spalding High School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the eleven plus exam. There are currently 150 places allocated to Year 7 students.

 

Spalding High School is a member of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools and so it is the Local Authority (LA) who co-ordinates the school’s admissions at Year 7.

 

With an average of four applications for every one place at Year 7 in recent years, should Spalding High be oversubscribed, it will apply the following criteria, in this order:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children with a sibling at the school at the time of application or who will be attending the school at the time of admission
  3. Increasing order of driving distance

 

Get further information about Spalding High’s admissions criteria via the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Spalding High School

 

Application arrangements for places in Year 7 at Spalding High School are coordinated by Lincolnshire County Council’s admissions team. Parents who live in Lincolnshire should apply online, while parents resident in other areas must

apply through their home local authority (LA).

 

In order for children to sit the 11 Plus exam, parents must also complete a registration form. These are available from local primary schools in January of Year 5, or a form can be downloaded from the Spalding High School website directly.

 

Parents will receive test results from the LA in October, with official offer letters being distributed in the following March.

 

Spalding High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Prospective pupils to Spalding High School must sit two 11 Plus exams on two separate dates. These exams are multiple-choice and cover the following:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions. Questions are divided into 15 or more sections, with 5 or 6 questions in each section.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. Questions must be answered one section at a time, with seven minutes allocated for each section. Pupils cannot move onto the next section until they are told to do so.

 

How to Prepare for the Spalding High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

To gain a Year 7 place at Spalding High School, your child must understand exactly what is expected of them in the Lincolnshire 11 Plus. Regular revision will soon highlight any knowledge gaps that your child might have, which will allow you to adapt their revision plan accordingly. As the tests focus on reasoning, you will find these two articles very useful when preparing your child’s revision plan:

 

Children who are confident about the tasks they will face in the exam room are more likely to perform well and achieve the required standard at 11+. Practice exam papers are a proven way of increasing your child’s confidence ahead of the exams, as they provide a greater understanding of the tests’ layout and question types.

 

The 11 Plus practice papers below cover all the required questions types that your child will face in the Spalding High School exam. Designed to challenge your child, they will highlight strengths and weaknesses. If your child is set to sit the Lincolnshire 11+ test, we would fully recommend the following practice papers:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Spalding High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Spalding Grammar School website

Spalding Grammar School (SGS) is a selective boys’ grammar, although girls are accepted into the school’s sixth form. Founded in 1588, the school is located in the Lincolnshire market town of Spalding.

 

The school was granted specialist status as a languages and engineering college in 2006, and was awarded an Ofsted ‘Outstanding’ rating in 2011. SGS became an academy in 2013. Thanks to various refurbishment projects, pupils enjoy new buildings that cater for drama, languages and business.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Spalding Grammar School

 

Address: Spalding Grammar School, Priory Road, Spalding PE11 2XH

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@spaldinggrammar.lincs.sch.uk, 01775 765800

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 944 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Spalding Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Spalding Grammar School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. SGS complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated arrangements for Year 7 admissions and is part of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools.

 

For further details about SGS’s admissions process and details of its oversubscription criteria, you are advised to call the school directly on 01775 765800.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Spalding Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Spalding Grammar School, parents should initially visit the Local Authority (LA) website to register their interest in a place. Parents should then download and complete the school’s registration form to book your child’s place for the eleven plus exam.

 

Parents will receive results via post in October, ahead of the deadline for the parental preference form to the LA. In March of the following year, the LA will send out offers for places based on the preferences submitted on the application form.

 

Spalding Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus test for Spalding Grammar School consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

 

How to Prepare for the Spalding Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

A popular grammar school in Lincolnshire, parents should expect their son to face strong competition for a Year 7 place at Spalding. To give children the best possible chance of achieving the required standard, parents should be willing to start their son’s revision well ahead of the exam date.

 

As SGS’s eleven plus focuses on reasoning,  we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

We understand that the thought of sitting the 11+ can cause some anxiety in children. If your son is showing any concern relating to the exam, consider using practice exam papers as a way of increasing his confidence. These papers will give him a better understanding of what is required in the test.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Spalding Grammar School exam. We would specifically recommend the following packs:

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Spalding Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the South Wilts Grammar School for Girls website

Founded in 1927, South Wilts Grammar School for Girls is located in Salisbury, Wiltshire. In 2003, the school gained specialist status in mathematics and computing and in 2010, it gained status as an international school. It achieved academy status in 2011.

 

Open to girls aged 11-18, South Wilts Grammar is a selective school and is consistently identified as one of the top-performing grammars for exam results in England.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for South Wilts Grammar School

 

Address: South Wilts Grammar School, Stratford Road, Salisbury SP1 3JJ

County: Wilshire

Admissions Info: admissions@swgs.wilts.sch.uk, 01722 323326

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 996 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Date: June / July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

South Wilts Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to South Wilts Grammar School for Girls in Year 7 is by academic selection, according to performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school is regularly oversubscribed and parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s open events before making an application to ensure that the school is a good fit for the pupil.

 

In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Girls who are eligible for the Pupil Premium and/or the Service Premium
  3. Girls who live in the school’s catchment area
  4. Girls who live outside of the catchment area and have a sister attending the school who is living at the same residence on the date of admission of the child
  5. Other girls in order of proximity to school

 

For further details about the school’s oversubscription criteria and/or the admissions process, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to South Wilts Grammar School

 

To apply for a place at South Wilts Grammar, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) and return it to the local authority, Wiltshire County Council. Parents are also obliged to complete a Supplementary Form and return it directly to the school. This form is only available when the Year 7 registration period is open.

 

Late applicants who pass the entrance test will be placed on the school’s waiting list in their relevant position, based on the oversubscription criteria, irrespective of the time of application.

South Wilts Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The South Wilts Grammar School for Girls eleven plus test consists of three papers:

 

  • Maths – this test lasts 50 minutes and covers the areas of number, algebra, measures, shape and space and handling data
  • English – a 45-minute test that may contain questions on reading comprehension, spelling, punctuation and grammar
  • Verbal Reasoning – this test lasts 50 minutes and includes questions testing vocabulary, codes, word patterns and more.

 

All three tests are multiple choice.

 

How to Prepare for the South Wilts Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

As a top-performing UK grammar school, competition for Year 7 places at South Wilts Grammar School for Girls is strong. At this stage, the school is looking for academic talent and the three-part 11 Plus test is set specifically to challenge candidates. However, with a good eleven plus study plan, your daughter should be able to rise to the challenge and approach the exam calmly and confidently.

 

Parents can help their daughters prepare for the  South Wilts Grammar 11+ by firstly reading our article on verbal reasoning skills as well as our 11 Plus guide to maths. Secondly, whatever your daughter’s current attainment level, she can improve her performance by using practice exam papers as part of her revision.

 

We have a number of practice papers to help boost your daughter’s confidence and expand her knowledge ahead of the South Wilts 11 Plus.  We would particularly recommend the following:

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Spelling (GL)

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

The information provided about South Wilts Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Skipton Girls' High School website

An all-girls selective grammar, Skipton Girls’ High School was founded in 1886 and is located in North Yorkshire. In 2003, it became the first all-girls school to be awarded specialist status as an engineering college and, in 2011, it became an academy. Since then, it has established itself as a founding member of the Northern Star Academies Trust.

 

Almost 800 girls are split across four houses, each of which is named after an influential woman – Brontë, Curie, Franklin and Johnson. The houses compete throughout the school year for the annual cup.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Skipton Girls’ High School

 

Address: Skipton Girls’ High School, Gargrave Road, Skipton BD23 1QL

County: North Yorkshire

Admissions Info: hawkinsg@sghs.org.uk, 01756 707600

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 794 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 116

Open Day Date: June/July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Skipton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Skipton Girls’ High School is responsible for its own selection tests, but is required to comply with the North Yorkshire Coordinated Scheme for secondary school admissions to Year 7. With 116 places available at this stage, the school is openly committed to prioritising places for girls within the Craven area of North Yorkshire. To be considered for a place at the school at Year 7, all prospective pupils must take the 11 Plus test coordinated by GL Assessment.

 

In the event of oversubscription in Year 7, the school will adhere to the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, girls who have reached the required standard.
  2. Girls who are registered as Pupil Premium and eligible for Free School Meals at the time of application.
  3. Girls living within the School’s Priority Area who have reached the required standard.
  4. Girls living outside the School’s Priority Area who have reached the required standard.

 

If you have more questions about the school’s admission process at Year 7, take a look at its complete admission policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Skipton Girls’ High School

 

Parents must complete a registration form for their daughter to take the school selection tests. This form can be downloaded directly from the school’s website and information about how to complete the form can be found in the school’s admissions handbook, which can be found online.

 

Late registration forms will only be received in exceptional circumstances, but parents should note that 11 Plus testing will not be possible for late entrants until after the date when Year 7 places are allocated.

 

Skipton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Eligible candidates will be required to sit three separate tests at 11+, in the following subjects:

 

  • Mathematics – this 50-minute paper consists of 50 multiple choice questions
  • English – this paper lasts 45-50 minutes and is made-up of 50 multiple choice questions. The test consists of two extracts with questions, with additional questions on spelling, punctuation, grammar
  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute paper consists of 85 multiple choice questions

 

How to Prepare for the Skipton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Skipton Girls’ High School has built a strong reputation for offering its pupils a well-rounded education, and is known for producing confident young women who go on to excellent further education. With an average of five applications at Year 7 for every place, there is plenty of competition for its 116 places.

 

As a parent, you are responsible for encouraging your child’s 11 Plus revision well ahead of the actual exam. Practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing your child’s confidence for Skipton Girls’ 11 Plus, as she can become more familiar with the tests’ requirements and better understand the types of reasoning questions she might be asked.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests will help your child  successfully prepare for Skipton Girls’ High School 11 Plus exam; we would specifically recommend the following practice packs:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

The information provided about Skipton Girls’ High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Skegness Grammar School website

Skegness Grammar School was initially founded in 1483 as Magdalen College School, but took its current name in 1933. A co-educational day and boarding grammar school, it teaches over 700 pupils aged 11-18 and is in the seaside Lincolnshire town of Skegness.

 

Previously classed as a High Performing Specialist School, Skegness Grammar achieved academy status in 2012 and is currently sponsored by the David Ross Education Trust. The school delivers a traditional curriculum and places particular emphasis on self-discipline and good manners from its students. When not studying, pupils can take part in a variety of extracurricular activities and enrichment programmes

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Skegness Grammar School

 

Address: Skegness Grammar School, Vernon Road, Skegness PE25 2QS

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@skegnessgrammar.co.uk, 01754 610000

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 716 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 130 (approximately)

Open Day Date: June/July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Skegness Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Skegness Grammar School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated admission arrangements for Year 7 admissions and is part of Lincolnshire Grammar Schools’ Consortium.

 

As the school does not publish its oversubscription criteria for Year 7, parents are advised to call 01754 610 000 with any questions.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Skegness Grammar School

 

Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) via the local authority (LA) website to register their child for an 11 Plus exam place.

 

Those living outside of Lincolnshire must return their CAF form to their own LA, who will forward the application to Lincolnshire LA.

Skegness Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Prospective pupils to Skegness Grammar School are required to sit two 11+ exams. Both papers are multiple choice and students will be tested on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this is a 50-minute test that is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning – this is a 40-minute test that consists of 70 questions and is split into five sections.

 

These papers are usually taken on separate days, but parents can make alternative arrangements that are more suitable to their child’s needs.

 

How to Prepare for the Skegness Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

For your child to achieve good results at 11+, they must be thoroughly prepared ahead of exam day. Allowing children plenty of time to study for the exams, without the need for any last minute exam preparation, will not only improve their confidence, but will also allow you to recognise any knowledge gaps that might exist.

 

Help your child to prepare for the 11 Plus exam by creating a study plan that’s achievable. Always opt for short bursts of regular study practice (say 20-30 minutes at a time), as opposed to irregular, lengthy sessions.

 

Our 11 Plus guide for parents will answer any further questions you have about the test. As the Skegness Grammar School eleven plus exam focuses on reasoning skills, your child will also benefit from the advice given in these articles:

 

 

Our practice exam papers at 11+ will help your child prepare for the Skegness Grammar School tests. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ GL Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ GL Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ GL Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ GL Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Skegness Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sir Thomas Rich's School website

Established in 1666, Sir Thomas Rich’s School is a boys’ grammar located in Oakleaze, Gloucestershire. Girls aged 16-18 have been accepted into the school’s Sixth Form since 1987. The school’s pupils are divided across four houses: Eastgate, Northgate, Southgate and Westgate.

 

In 2010, the school became an academy and in recent years it has significantly grown and has undergone modernisation. Although a modern centre for learning, Sir Thomas Rich’s prides itself on its rich heritage and remains proud of its traditions.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sir Thomas Rich’s School

 

Address: Sir Thomas Rich’s School, Oakleaze, Gloucester GL2 0LF

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: srb@strs.org.uk, 01452 338400

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 814 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)

 

Sir Thomas Rich’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for one of the 120 Year 7 places at Sir Thomas Rich’s School, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. The school’s admissions are centrally-coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council and parents who want to register their child to sit the 11+ test for the school must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form. This can be found on the school’s homepage when registration is open.

 

Sir Thomas Rich’s has no catchment area, nor is priority given to siblings during the place allocation process. However, looked after (or previously looked after) children and those in receipt of pupil premium who achieve the required standard in the test may be given priority. Parents are advised to call the school directly on 01452 338400 to confirm exact details.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sir Thomas Rich’s School

 

For your child to be considered for a Year 7 place at Sir Thomas Rich’s School, you must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online via your Local Authority (LA) and a test registration form, available via the school’s website during the registration period. Once you receive the result of the test in October, you must state your ranked preferences on the CAF. The LA will send out official place allocations in March of the following year.

 

Sir Thomas Rich’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Sir Thomas Rich’s School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam by University of Durham. This test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:

 

 

Both tests are taken on the same day and each last 45-50 minutes. Answers are completed on separate sheets and pupils can work out any answers on the question booklet.

 

How to Prepare for the Sir Thomas Rich’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we understand that the thought of the 11 Plus can cause anxiety for both children and parents. However, with our considerable experience in producing expert respurces, we’re here to allay any concerns. In the first instance, work with your child to prepare a thorough revision timetable. If your child is distracted or bored by any extra revision sessions, include revision games where appropriate to encourage motivation.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective revision practice for the Sir Thomas Rich’s 11 Plus. These papers are an excellent way of improving your child’s time management skills, especially if taken under timed conditions. The more papers that are taken this way, the more your child will become familiar with the test layout and how quickly they will be required to answer questions in the exam.

 

For the Sir Thomas Rich’s 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Sir Thomas Rich’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sir Roger Manwood's School website

Located in the historic Kent town of Sandwich, Sir Roger Manwood’s School is a co-educational grammar and is one of England’s 35 state boarding schools. Founded in 1563, the school achieved academy status in 2011. Pupils in Years 7 to 10 are divided into four houses: Dorman, Knolles, Trappes and Tudor.

 

The school encourages its students to be inquisitive and independent. It offers a range of extracurricular activities that students can participate in outside of the classroom, including sports, drama and music.

 

For an insight into academic life at Sir Roger Manwood’s School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sir Roger Manwood’s School

 

Address: Sir Roger Manwood’s School, Manwood Road, Sandwich CT13 9JX

County: Kent

Admissions Info: info@manwoods.co.uk, 01304 610200

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 914 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: September and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL)

 

Sir Roger Manwood’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Sir Roger Manwood’s School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. To be considered for one of the 150 places available, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard. The school encourages both parents and pupils to attend one of its open events before registering for the school. At these events, school staff will be on hand to answer any questions parents might have regarding the admissions process and parents will have the opportunity to tour the school.

 

In 2016, Sir Roger Manwood’s School made a few changes to its admissions process. Whether your child is set to be a day pupil or boarder, you are advised to read this document before registering your child for the eleven plus test, as it discusses the school’s oversubscription criteria and explains how boarding and day places are allocated.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sir Roger Manwood’s School

 

Parents who wish to register their child for the 11+ test must do so before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test, you must complete an online registration form via the local authority (LA), Kent County Council.

 

Once your child has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents are required to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to their LA. This process can usually be done online. The LA will send assessment decisions to parents in October and offers will be sent out on National Offer Day in March the following year.

 

If you have any further queries about Sir Roger Manwood’s School admissions process at Year 7, call the school on 01304 610200 or email info@manwoods.co.uk.

 

Sir Roger Manwood’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The majority of grammar schools in Kent use the Kent Test at 11 Plus and Sir Roger Manwood’s is among them. The Kent 11+ exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, each with a separate answer sheet, in the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Children will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.

 

  1. A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases and/or in appeals for a school place.

 

How to Prepare for the Sir Roger Manwood’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is one of the most competitive grammar school areas in England, so for your child to succeed in the Kent eleven plus exam, they must be committed to investing additional time into learning and revising in the build-up to the test.

 

One piece of advice that we consistently share with parents is to encourage children to revise ‘little and often’. Children who approach their revision sessions in this manner are more likely to perform better in exams, compared with those who opt for longer sessions.

 

The Kent Test covers many different subject areas. Your child must be able to show their ability across all topics, so if they do have a weaker subject, use practice exam papers to highlight this early on in their revision. Our exam papers are an excellent way of monitoring your child’s progress week-to-week.

 

Pupils sitting the Kent Test with the aim of attaining a Year 7 place at Sir Roger Manwood’s School, will benefit from these resources:
Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)

 

These practice tests are designed to replicate the format, content, structure, question types, style and timings of the actual Kent 11 plus exam.

 

For additional, subject-specific revision of multiple-choice questions, we would also recommend these practice exam papers:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

If your child’s 11+ exam is looming and you’re concerned about a lack of time, don’t worry, we have put together some practical last minute tips on how to prepare for the exam.

 

The information provided about Sir Roger Manwood’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sale Grammar School website

Located in Trafford, Greater Manchester, Sale Grammar School is a co-educational facility founded in 1991. A selective school, Sale Grammar achieved academy status in 2011 and has specialist status in Visual Arts, Science and Maths.

 

The school aims to teach its pupils a traditional and challenging curriculum, while encouraging them to be innovative and creative. Pupils are active within the local community through a range of initiatives including arts, sports and science.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sale Grammar School

 

Address: Sale Grammar School, Marsland Road, Sale M33 3NH

County: Greater Manchester

Admissions Info: office@salegrammar.co.uk, 0161 973 3217

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,269 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7:  180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Sale Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Sale Grammar School is part of Trafford Grammar Schools CEM Consortium and is responsible for its own Year 7 admissions. All four schools within the Consortium use the same 11+ test. Admission to Sale Grammar School is determined by pupil performance in this 11 Plus exam.

 

Sale Grammar offers 180 places at Year 7 and, due to its popularity, always encourages parents and children to attend its open day in June. This event will give you a better idea of whether a grammar school education is the right learning environment for your child.

 

Sale Grammar School is consistently oversubscribed for Year 7 places, and so it uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children.
  2. Applicants living in the priority admission area as defined by postcodes M33, WA14, WA15, plus Trafford Authority residents within the M23 postcode.
  3. Applicants from outside the priority admission area will be placed in rank order as determined by their scores in the selection tests.

 

For more information about Sale Grammar’s admissions policy, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sale Grammar School

 

To apply for a place at Sale Grammar, parents must register their child for the school’s entrance examination. A link to the registration form will be available on the school’s admissions page from early May until late June. Further information about registration can be obtained from all primary schools in the catchment area.

 

In addition to completing the registration form, parents also need to complete a Local Authority Common Preference Form. Sale Grammar School should be listed on the form in ranked order of preference. Late applications can be considered but only after all other applications that were submitted before the deadline.

 

Sale Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam at Sale Grammar School consists of two test papers, covering:

Each paper lasts approximately one hour and contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions. There will be a short break between the two papers.

 

For your child to be in with a chance of gaining a place at the school, they will need a qualifying score of 334. The results of the entrance exam are posted in October.

 

How to Prepare for the Sale Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Our in-depth guide to studying for the 11 Plus exam covers everything you need to know about creating a revision plan. If your child is set to take the Sale Grammar School 11+ tests, you may also benefit from the following articles:

 

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we would recommend starting your child’s exam preparation early with practice exam papers. These papers will give you a general overview of your child’s current abilities and will identify their strengths and weaknesses.

 

As the exam date gets closer, try to encourage your child to do the tests under timed conditions to get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

Our practice papers come complete with answers, enabling you to accurately measure your child’s performance and track their improvements. We have a host of 11 Plus practice papers that are specifically designed to help prepare your child for entry to Sale Grammar School.

 

We recommend using the following resources to prepare for the CEM 11+ exam used by Sale Grammar School:

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Spelling

 

The information provided about Sale Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sir Joseph Williamson's Mathematical School website

Located in Rochester, Kent, Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School (‘The Math’) is a boys-only grammar school that educates around 1,250 boys aged 11-18, with girls admitted into the Sixth Form. The school became an academy in 2011 and was one of the first 100 schools in the UK to be designated a National Teaching School.

 

The Math sets its pupils a challenging academic curriculum, while encouraging them to participate in a wide array of extracurricular activities and sports clubs. While the school is in many ways traditional, it does not shy away from a progressive approach to both teaching and learning. This ethos is reflected in the modern facilities that the school offers its pupils day-to-day.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School

 

Address: Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School, Maidstone Road, Rochester ME1 3EL

County: Kent (Medway)

Admissions Info: office@sjwms.co.uk, 01634 844008

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,250 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus (CEM)

 

Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are 180 Year 7 places available at Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School and these are allocated based on student performance in the 11+ entrance exam. Ahead of submitting an application, the school encourages parents to attend one of its open events.

 

Schools within the Medway local authority (LA) use different allocation criteria for Year 7 places, so parents are advised to confirm The Math’s exact admission criteria with the school before completing the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

In the event of oversubscription, the LA will allocate places, giving priority to:

  1. Looked after children and previously looked after children.
  2. Children with a Statement of Special Educational Needs/Education, Health
    and Care Plan that names the school.
  3. Children who at the time of application have a sibling at the school.
  4. Children with health issues, supported by medical evidence, which requires the child to attend this school.
  5. Children who at the time of application have a parent who is a member of staff
    at the school.
  6. Children who live nearest to the school.

 

Sir Joseph Williamson’s uses the Medway Test for admission to the school. Children who attend a primary school in the area will take the exam at their current school. Those who live outside the area will take the exam in an independent test centre.

More information on the Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School exam can be accessed on the Medway local authority website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF), which is administered by the Medway local authority.

 

All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about registration. Alternatively, parents can call the Admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 with any pressing questions about the application process.

 

Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

 

Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple choice and last 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and last 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

In The Medway Test, the 11 Plus maths and English sections are double-weighted in comparison to the verbal reasoning section. This means the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the verbal reasoning score in the Medway 11+.

 

How to Prepare for the Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The build-up to the Medway test can be an anxious time for parents and children, but with some forward-planning, it shouldn’t disrupt normal family life.

 

Give your son plenty of time for revision before the exam date. Try to adopt a steady approach to studying over several months to give your son the best chance of succeeding in the test. The more calm and confident he is going into the exam room, the more chance he’ll have of gaining a Year 7 place at Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School.

 

Encourage your son to include 11 Plus practice papers in his revision routine and set these papers under timed conditions to give him practice of answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For the Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ English Spelling

 

The information provided about Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School website

Founded in 1881, Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School is a selective school based in Canterbury, Kent that teaches girls aged 11-18. Boys have been admitted into the school’s Sixth Form since 2010.

 

Over 1,000 students are taught at Simon Langton Girls’, with the school placing emphasis on developing positive relationships between pupils and teachers and forging mutual respect. Recognising the importance of good health among students, the school has built a health and wellbeing programme that supports its pupils with mental health issues and encourages physical activities.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School

 

Address: Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School, Old Dover Road, Canterbury CT1 3EW

County: Kent

Admissions Info: post@langton.kent.sch.uk, 01227 463711

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,086 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 165

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test

 

Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar, prospective pupils must sit the Kent Test at 11 Plus and achieve the required standard. Parents and children are invited to attend one of the school’s open events, which are usually held in October. At the event, parents can ask any questions they have about the admissions process and will also be able to take a tour of the school.

 

Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar has recently changed its admissions process for Year 7, so parents are advised to read its current admissions policy closely before registering their daughter for a Year 7 place.

 

In case of oversubscription, Dartford Grammar School gives priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children with a sibling at the school at the time of application
  3. Medical, health, social and special access reasons
  4. Children in receipt of Pupil Premium
  5. Proximity of a child’s home to the school

 

Visit the school’s website for more information about its admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete Kent County Council’s online registration form.

 

Once your daughter has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents are required to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive 11+ results from the Council by mid-October, with offers sent out in March.

 

If you have any further queries about Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School admissions process at Year 7, email the school at post@langton.kent.sch.uk or call 01227 463711.

 

Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The majority of Kent’s 35 selective grammar schools and 4 partially selective schools use the Kent Test at 11 Plus for Year 7 places. The Kent Exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with a separate answer sheet, in the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Girls will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
  3. A 40-minute writing task. This will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be used in borderline cases.

 

How to Prepare for the Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is one of the most competitive grammar school areas in England, so for your daughter to secure one of the 165 Year 7 places at Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar, it’s vital that she prepares well.

 

Primary school children are shown to perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer time period. As such, revision sessions should be short but frequent, while ensuring that your daughter continues to participate in her normal extracurricular activities and social events.

 

We recommend using practice exam papers as a way of highlighting any weaker areas that your daughter may have. Don’t be afraid to introduce these papers at the beginning of her revision, as they will allow you to monitor her progress as the exam approaches.

 

Pupils sitting the Kent Test, will benefit from practising with these resources, which are specifically designed to help students prepare for the Kent Test:

 

Additionally, if your child requires further practice in a particular subject area, the following practice papers will prove useful:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling (GL)

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Rugby High School website

Founded in 1903, Rugby High School is a selective girls’ grammar based in Bilton, Warwickshire. Boys are, however, accepted into the Sixth Form. Almost 800 students are split across four houses and participate in inter-house sports, music and charitable activities throughout the school year.

 

While offering a challenging academic curriculum, Rugby High School also places significant importance on preparing its girls for life after school, offering them a wide range of extracurricular activities and encouraging them to develop their social skills from Year 7.

 

For a look at pupils’ daily life at Rugby High School, watch this pupil-filmed video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Rugby High School

 

Address: Rugby High School, Longrood Road, Rugby CV22 7RE

County: Warwickshire

Admissions Info: rhsadmin@rugbyhighschool.co.uk, 01788 810518

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 800 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Warwickshire CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Rugby High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

The 120 Year 7 places at Rugby High School will be allocated based on pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Parents are advised to attend the school’s open day in June before applying for a place. At the event, you will be able to ask questions about the admissions process and prospective pupils can learn more about the school and its learning environment.

 

In recent years, Rugby High School has been heavily oversubscribed for Year 7 places, so should there be more applications than available spots, the school will apply its oversubscription criteria until all places are filled.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Rugby High School

 

The admissions service at Warwickshire County Council coordinates Year 7 entry to Rugby High School. This service operates the same entrance test procedure as The Grammar Schools in Birmingham Consortium.

 

To apply for entry to the school, parents must register their daughter for the school’s entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form (CAF). The school’s admissions policy states that late 11 Plus registrations will not be considered in the first round of offers.

 

Parents will be notified by post of their child’s 11+ score by mid-October, with the first round of place allocations available from the beginning of March.

 

Rugby High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Rugby High School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last for 45 minutes each. They contain a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering the following subjects:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Mathematics

 

The Verbal Reasoning exam includes an English component, which involves a comprehension and cloze test. The maths exam involves a numeracy test, which tests for ability in mental arithmetic and problem-solving questions.

 

How to Prepare for the Rugby High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Your daughter should be prepared to work through a dedicated revision plan on top of her usual school work in the run-up to the 11 Plus exam. Just 20-30 minutes extra revision every day can help her prepare for the test.

 

The Rugby High School 11+ requires your daughter to have a good knowledge across a range of subjects, so it’s a good idea to work out where her knowledge gaps lie. Practice exam papers can accurately measure her performance and track her improvements in the lead-up to the tests.

 

If your daughter is preparing for the Rugby High School entrance exam, we have several 11 Plus practice papers that can help:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Spelling

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about Rugby High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Ripon Grammar School website

One of the top 50 schools in the UK, Ripon Grammar is a selective, co-educational establishment based in the cathedral city of Ripon, North Yorkshire. Originally a boys’ school founded in 1555, girls were admitted in 1962. Today, over 900 students attend the school and, while the majority are day pupils, a number opt to board too.

 

In recent years, Ripon Grammar School has undergone a succession of improvements, including a new sports hall, sixth form block and laboratories. A catchment school, Ripon Grammar prides itself on serving an excellent education to the children of the local community.

 

For an insight into life at Ripon Grammar School, watch this short video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Ripon Grammar School

 

Address: Ripon Grammar School, Clotherholme Road, Ripon HG4 2DG

County: North Yorkshire

Admissions Info: admin@ripongrammar.co.uk, 01765 602 647

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 920 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 117 (includes up to 14 boarding places)

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Ripon Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

While Ripon Grammar School is responsible for its own admissions policy in Year 7, it is the Local Authority (LA), North Yorkshire County Council, that manages the admissions and allocates places. Ripon Grammar has 117 places available in Year 7 and priority is given to both looked after and previously looked after children within the school’s catchment area. More details about North Yorkshire’s grammar school admissions policies can be found on the LA’s website.

 

The school offers places to the highest scoring 28 per cent of pupils who live within the catchment area. In the event of any surplus places, these are offered to pupils outside of the catchment. To be considered for a Year 7 place at Ripon Grammar, all prospective pupils must take the 11 Plus test, coordinated by GL Assessment.

 

For more information about the admissions process for Ripon Grammar School, visit the Council’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ripon Grammar School

 

Children living within Ripon Grammar School’s catchment area will be automatically entered into the LA’s selection scheme (unless parents choose to withdraw their child from the process). Parents should be aware that testing may not be possible for pupils who register after the closing date.

 

Parents will receive results in October and place allocations will be distributed in March the following year.

 

Ripon Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus tests for Ripon Grammar School consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is divided into four sections, with 10 minutes allocated to each one. Once a section has been completed by pupils, they cannot go back to that section.

 

How to Prepare for the Ripon Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Ripon Grammar consistently produces excellent exam results and the school is popular with parents in the local area, attracting at least five applications for every Year 7 place. With this level of competition to consider, parents should be prepared to start their child’s 11 Plus revision well ahead of the actual exam.

 

North Yorkshire’s LA 11 Plus tests focus on reasoning, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

Practice exam papers can give your child the edge over the competition and can boost their confidence. They also enable them to become more familiar with tests’ requirements and better understand the types of reasoning questions they may be asked.

 

We would strongly recommend that students do timed practice papers ahead of the exam to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions under time pressure.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests are designed to help your child prepare for Ripon Grammar School’s exam. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Ripon Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Ribston Hall High School website

Ribston Hall High School is a selective girls’ grammar situated in the city of Gloucester. Founded in 1921, it achieved academy status in 2011 and currently teaches approximately 850 girls aged 11-18.

 

Ribston Hall was given specialist school status in humanities and also became Gloucester’s only sports specialist school with languages. Thanks to funding in recent years, the school has been able to extend its sixth form facilities and in 2017 was deemed the most ‘oversubscribed grammar school in Gloucestershire’.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Ribston Hall High School

 

Address: Ribston Hall High School, Ribston Hall High School, Stroud Road, Gloucester GL1 5LE

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: rhhs@ribstonhall.gloucs.sch.uk, 01452 382249

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 850 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: April and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (Gloucestershire)

 

Ribston Hall High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

For your daughter to be in with a chance of gaining one of the 120 Year 7 places available at the school, she must reach the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. Like all the other grammar schools in Gloucestershire, Ribston Hall’s Year 7 allocations are dealt with via Gloucestershire County Council.

 

Ribston Hall is usually oversubscribed in Year 7. In such cases, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, in this priority order:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, girls
  2. Girls who ranked highest in the qualifying standard
  3. Girls who qualify for Pupil Premium who have met the qualifying standard
  4. The geographical proximity to the school measured in a straight line from the centre of the student’s main residence

 

To find out more about Ribston Hall High School’s admissions process in Year 7, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ribston Hall High School

 

Ribston Hall High School adheres to the same testing process for 11+ as the other grammar schools in Gloucestershire. The test is created by the Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). In order for your daughter to be considered for a place, you need to complete a Common Application Form online via the Local Authority website and a test registration form, which will be available on the school’s website during the registration period.

 

Late registrations will only be considered in exceptional circumstances.

 

The Local Authority will send test results to parents and guardians in October. If your daughter meets the qualifying standard, you can apply for a place at Ribston Hall. Parents will receive information about Year 7 place allocations in March of the following year.

 

Ribston Hall High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Ribston Hall High School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam by the University of Durham. The test consists of two papers covering:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Numerical Reasoning (Maths)

Both tests are made-up of multiple-choice questions, are taken on the same day and last 45-50 minutes each.

 

Our guide to 11+ exam boards will give you more information about what to expect from the CEM test.

 

How to Prepare for the Ribston Hall High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Ribston Hall High School is one of the most popular selective schools in Gloucestershire, so parents should expect competition for Year 7 places. With 120 places available, your daughter should prepare for the 11+ exam well ahead of exam day. The best way to help her with her exam preparation is to work together to devise a thorough revision timetable.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective revision practice for the Ribston Hall High School 11 Plus. The earlier you start with these practice papers, the sooner you will be aware of any weaker subject areas. The papers will not only familiarise your daughter with the layout of the exam but will help to improve her time management skills.

 

For the Ribston Hall High School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Ribston Hall High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Reading School for Boys website

Reading School for Boys is a boys-only grammar based in Reading, Berkshire. One of the oldest schools in England, it was initially founded in 1125 as the school of Reading Abbey and was re-founded in 1486. Reading School accepts both day pupils and boarders and currently educates 900 boys.

 

Reading School gained academy status in 2011 and since then has undergone significant refurbishment, resulting in a new science block, computing rooms and a lecture theatre. While the school instills its traditions in its pupils, it also looks to bring innovation and entrepreneurial spirit to their learning.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Reading School for Boys

 

 

Address: Reading Grammar School, Erleigh Road, Reading RG1 5LW

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: Secretary@reading-school.co.uk, 0118 9015600

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 890

Number of Places in Year 7: 150: 12 boarders (maximum) and 138 day pupils (minimum)

Open Day Date: April and May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Reading School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Reading School for Boys is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. If you are considering Reading School as an option for your son, you are advised to attend one of the school’s open days. At the event, you will be able to take a tour of the school, talk to staff and get a better understanding of the overall admissions process.

 

Reading School is one of a number of grammar schools across Berkshire that uses the same 11+ entrance exam administered by CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring), which is affiliated to the University of Durham.

 

Unfortunately, the school cannot guarantee a place for every pupil that meets the required standard. The school is heavily oversubscribed and uses the following criteria to determine place allocation, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children
  2. Students who live within the designated area of the school and is eligible for the pupil premium or service premium
  3. Pupils whose home address is within the designated area of the school
  4. Students whose home address is not within the designated area of the school

 

For more information about Reading School for Boys’ admission criteria, please visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Reading School for Boys

 

To register interest for a Year 7 place at Reading School for Boys, parents must complete their Local Authority’s (LA) Common Application Form (CAF). To register for the 11+ admissions test itself, parents need to complete a separate application directly with the school. This registration can be done online when the application window is open. Applications received after the school’s deadline will not be accepted.

 

Parents will receive the results of their child’s 11+ exam in October, before the deadline for the submission of the CAF.

 

Reading School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The CEM 11 Plus test for Reading School for Boys comprises of two separate papers, each lasting 50 minutes. Each test will assess:

 

 

Boys are expected to show competence in skills appropriate to Key Stage 2 English and Mathematics and to be able to apply these creatively.

 

How to Prepare for the Reading School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

Reading School for Boys regularly appears towards the top of UK school league tables and receives an average of five applications for every Year 7 place. In short, your son will have to be thoroughly prepared ahead of the exam and have the confidence to believe that he can secure his place at the school.

 

Begin by setting your son a detailed study timetable, split into realistic revision sessions, each lasting 30 minutes. These manageable blocks of revision will go some way to ensuring that your son doesn’t become overworked or distracted.

 

Reading School for Boys’ 11 Plus exam focuses heavily on reasoning skills, which can be difficult for some children to learn. Reading the following articles ahead of his exam preparation may help:

 

 

The CEM 11+ requires children to answer questions quickly and confidently, so your child needs to have mastered their time management skills ahead of the exam.

 

Introducing our practice exam papers into your son’s routine can help give him a better idea of roughly how much time he has to answer each question. They can also help monitor his progress and identify weak spots.

 

Our 11 Plus practice papers can help your child to prepare for the Reading School for Boys exam. We would specifically recommend:

 

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ CEM Spelling

 

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

 

The information provided about Reading School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Rainham Mark Grammar School is a co-educational grammar school for children aged 11 – 18 and is based in Medway, Kent. Previously known as Gillingham Grammar School, it took on its current name in 1975. An academy school, Rainham Mark provides its 1,200 pupils with a friendly and caring environment.

 

Rainham Mark encourages its students to participate in a variety of extracurricular activities, including performing arts, sport and music. The school also organises regular field trips or cultural exchanges as part of its curriculum.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Rainham Mark Grammar School

 

Address: Rainham Mark Grammar School, Pump Lane, Rainham, Gillingham ME8 7AJ

County: Kent – Medway

Admissions Info: office@rmgs.org.uk, 01634 364151

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,238 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 205

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus (CEM)

 

Rainham Mark Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Rainham Mark School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 205 places allocated to Year 7 students. Parents are advised to attend the school’s open evening to get more information about the admission process.

 

The Medway Test is used by Medway grammar schools. Children who attend a primary school in the area will take the 11 Plus exam at their current school. Those who live outside the area will take the exam in an independent test centre.

 

In the event of oversubscription, the school applies the following criteria, giving priority to:

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children who receive free school meals
  3. Rank order of score as determined by Medway’s Selection Procedures

For more details about Rainham Mark Grammar School’s admissions process, please refer to the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Rainham Mark Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Rainham Mark Grammar School, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF), as administered by the Medway local authority.

 

All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about the registration process. Alternatively, the school recommends calling the Admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 if you have any outstanding questions.

 

Rainham Mark Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Rainham Mark Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

  • A verbal reasoning test
  • A maths test
  • An English (extended writing) test

 

Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple-choice and last 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and last 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

In previous years, in The Medway Test, the 11 Plus maths and writing sections have been double-weighted in comparison to the Verbal Reasoning.

 

How to Prepare for the Rainham Mark Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

If Rainham Mark Grammar School is one of your chosen preferences for Year 7, your child must sit the Medway Test at 11 Plus. It’s important to plan ahead and use the most relevant practice resources available in order to keep stress levels to a minimum. We advise parents that 11 Plus preparation should start as early as possible, as leaving it until the last minute can cause unnecessary worry and won’t produce good results.

 

Encourage your child to do some 11 Plus practice papers under timed conditions for the Medway Test, to get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For the Rainham Mark Grammar School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Rainham Mark Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Mary's Grammar School website

Walsall-based Queen Mary’s Grammar School was founded in 1554 and is a selective boys’ grammar. One of the oldest schools in the UK, it gained academy status in June 2011 and is a specialist Language College.

 

Rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, the school has received funds to build a new school wing and in recent years has completed projects including a new sports hall, swimming facilities and biology laboratories.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Mary’s Grammar School

 

Address: Queen Mary’s Grammar School, Sutton Road, Walsall WS1 2PG

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: postbox@qmgs.walsall.sch.uk, 01922 720696

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 722 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Dates: June and July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Queen Mary’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Queen Mary’s Grammar School is part of the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton, but the school itself administers the 11 Plus tests. Pupils must reach the required standard via an 11+ entrance exam to be considered for entry to Queen Mary’s, although achieving this standard does not automatically secure a place.

 

With 150 places available in Year 7, prospective pupils must achieve the qualifying score in the 11+ test to be considered. If the number of applications exceeds the number of places available, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children who achieve the qualifying score
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score (limited to 30 places)
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score until the admissions number is reached

 

Get further details about Queen Mary’s admissions process on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Mary’s Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Queen Mary’s Grammar School, parents must first complete the Once boys have sat the test, parents must complete a Local Authority (LA) Preference form, listing Queen Mary’s as a choice.

 

If you do not list a preference for Queen Mary’s, your son will not be offered a place, no matter how successful he is in the entrance test.

 

Queen Mary’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Queen Mary’s Grammar School 11+ exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 45 minutes. The papers assess:

 

 

Some of the questions are multiple choice and the papers will be divided into smaller, individually-timed sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Mary’s Grammar School11 Plus Exam?

 

As experienced teachers and tutors, we know that the build-up to the 11 Plus can be an anxious time for both children and parents. But equally, we know that devising a good study plan and using the best practice papers will increase your child’s confidence and is more likely to result in a good 11+ performance.

 

All children benefit from regular exam practice sessions, whatever their natural attainment, so for the Queen Mary’s Grammar School 11 Plus test, it’s advisable to introduce practice exam papers into your son’s study early on. These papers allow pupils to get a better idea of the types of questions they can expect in the exam and also provide parents with a good indication of their child’s current abilities.

 

Practice exam papers are an excellent way of highlighting weaker skills or subjects, giving children more time to improve ahead of exam day.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we have a host of 11+ practice papers suitable for those sitting CEM-style 11 Plus exams, suchs as the ones used at Queen Mary’s Grammar School:

 

 

The information provided about Queen Mary’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth's High School 11 Plus exam

Originally founded in 1589 as a boys’ grammar, Queen Elizabeth’s High School (QEHS) completed a merge with the local girls’ school in 1983 to form its current set-up. Almost 1,200 pupils are taught at this co-educational grammar and are divided across six houses to compete in inter-school events including sport, art and music.

 

While providing pupils with a balanced academic curriculum, QEHS also places emphasis on ensuring its students are happy and confident. The school offers a counselling service, peer listening and gives pupils work experience opportunities throughout their time at QEHS.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth’s High School

 

 

Address: Queen Elizabeth’s High School Gainsborough, Morton Terrace, Gainsborough DN21 2ST

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: office@qehs.lincs.sch.uk, 01427 612354

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,171 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Queen Elizabeth’s High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

As a community grammar school, Queen Elizabeth’s High School is run by Lincolnshire Local Authority (LA). The school is part of Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools and it is the LA, rather than the school, that controls Year 7 admissions.

 

Admission to QEHS in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 180 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open evening, which takes place in June.

 

In the event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children
  2. Children with a sibling at the school at the time of application
  3. Children of staff employed at the school
  4. The school is 9 miles or less from the child’s home address by driving distance
  5. The school is more than 9 miles from the child’s home address by driving distance

 

Please refer to the school’s admissions arrangement policy for more details, or visit the website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth’s High School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Queen Elizabeth’s High School, parents should visit the LA’s website to complete a Common Registration Form (CAF).

 

As the school will administer the 11+ test, parents must complete QEHS’s application form. If this is not returned by the deadline, your child will not be able to sit the exam. Parents will receive test results from the LA in October, with official offer letters being distributed the following March, based on the preferences submitted on the CAF.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus test for Queen Elizabeth’s High School consists of two multiple-choice papers, taken over two exam dates:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions. The test involves a mix of questions which involve the use of letters and words, with some questions (approximately 20%) involving the use of numbers.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. This test uses questions involving shapes.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

With an average of four applications for every one place at Year 7, your child must be well prepared for the Lincolnshire 11 Plus. QEHS’s test focuses on reasoning, so read these useful articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 
Practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing your child’s confidence ahead of the tests, as they provide a greater understanding of the test’s layout and question types. To succeed at the 11+, children must have a solid grasp of time management. By using these practice papers under timed conditions, your child will have a good idea of how long to spend on each question type.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Queen Elizabeth High School exam. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth’s High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Mary’s High School website

Founded in 1893, Queen Mary’s High School is a selective, girls’ only grammar based in Walsall, West Midlands. A recognised academy, the school educates approximately 700 pupils, who are divided into four houses: Austen, Brontë, Eliot and Shelley.

 

Queen Mary’s offers its pupils a traditional curriculum, while providing a range of extracurricular activities, exchanges, trips and other enrichment activities. Pupils can participate in in-house competitions, numerous clubs and can join the Student Council during their time at the school.

 

For an insight into life at Queen Mary’s High School, watch this short interview with the school’s headteacher:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Mary’s High School

 

Address: Queen Mary’s High School, Upper Forster Street, Walsall WS4 2AE

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: 01922 721013

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 700 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: April, June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)


Queen Mary’s High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Queen Mary’s High School operates its admissions arrangements and procedures in line with Walsall Council’s coordinated scheme for school admissions and is part of the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton.

 

The Consortium requires that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the CEM 11 Plus exam. Pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ to be eligible for admission. However, attaining the qualifying score does not guarantee girls a place at the school.

 

If the number of applications exceeds the number of places available, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after children who achieve the qualifying score
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score (limited to 30 places)
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score until the admissions number is reached

 

You can find further details about Queen Mary’s High School admissions process via the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Mary’s High School

 

 

Parents must make an application to their Local Authority (LA). If you live in Walsall, your LA is Walsall Council and you must complete its Common Application Form (CAF). On this form, you can choose at least three schools as preferences for Year 7.

 

If you do not list Queen Mary’s High School as a preference, your daughter will not be eligible for a place there. Parents are also required to register their daughter for the 11+ test via the school itself. This can be done online when registration is open.

 

Parents will be notified of official place offers in March.

 

 

Queen Mary’s High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Queen Mary’s High School 11+ exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 45 minutes. Both papers will cover all subjects: Numerical Reasoning, Comprehension, Literacy, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Verbal Reasoning.

 

Some of the questions are multiple choice and the papers will be divided into smaller, individually-timed sections.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Mary’s High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As a relatively small grammar school, Queen Mary’s is regularly oversubscribed in Year 7, with an average of five applications for every place. If Queen Mary’s is your daughter’s first choice of school, you must ensure that she has all the necessary resources to perform well in the 11 Plus exam.

 

To give your daughter the best chance of receiving an offer of a Year 7 place, ensure she has a detailed revision plan to follow. A timetable will ensure that your daughter covers everything she’ll need to know for the tests, without being overworked.

 

In order for your daughter to have the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Queen Mary’s High School, encourage her to use practice exam papers throughout her revision.

 

We would particularly recommend the following practice resources for the Queen Mary’s 11+ exam:

 

 

The information provided about Queen Mary’s High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth's School, Barnet website

Founded in 1573, Queen Elizabeth’s School is a boys’ grammar situated in Barnet, a market town in North London. Consistently one of the most academically successful grammar schools in England, it is an academy with a specialism in music.

 

Beyond the classroom, the school’s 1,000+ boys can participate in a range of sporting activities including cricket, rugby, athletics and water polo. The school prides itself on investing in these ‘enrichment’ activities, to ensure pupils are kept active and healthy.

 

For an insight into a life at Queen Elizabeth’s School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth’s School, Barnet

 

 

Address: Queen Elizabeth’s School, Queen’s Road, Barnet EN5 4DQ

County: Hertfordshire / London Borough of Barnet

Admissions Info: enquiries@qebarnet.co.uk, 0208 441 4646

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,182

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Queen Elizabeth’s School for Year 7 is by academic selection, following an entrance exam taken in September. With an average of 10 applications for every Year 7 place, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend the school’s open day in July, which will give you an opportunity to ask any outstanding questions about the school’s academic requirements.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s School has a strict oversubscription policy. In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the rank order for place allocations will be solely determined by the distance from the child’s home to the school. No other criteria shall be applied unless there is a tie following this determination.

 

A thorough explanation of Queen Elizabeth’s admissions process can be found on the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth’s School

 

 

To apply for a place at Queen Elizabeth’s School, Barnet, parents must complete both the school’s online registration form and the local authority (LA) Common Application Form (CAF).

 

Parents should be aware of the school and LA’s application dates, as late applications are very unlikely to be considered.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11+ entrance exam at Queen Elizabeth’s School, Barnet consists of two multiple-choice test papers, covering English and Mathematics. Both papers are taken by candidates in the same session.

 

After the tests are completed, they will be marked and the scores will be fully age-standardised. The scores from the two tests will be combined to produce a single, overall entrance test score for each candidate. Candidates who achieve a combined score of 210 or higher will have met the standard required and will be considered for admission to the school.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Barnet’s Queen Elizabeth School is one of the UK’s top-performing grammars, so your son is likely to face strong competition for a Year 7 place. Don’t opt to leave your 11 Plus preparation until the last minute. Instead, set-up an achievable but challenging 11 Plus study plan well ahead of the 11+ exam to ensure your son understands the work that will be required to give it his best.

 

Starting revision early is key, so that your child has time to cover everything they need to know for the exam. The sooner their revision starts, the less likely they’ll be to become overwhelmed by the workload.

 

If your son is sitting his 11+ in the hope of gaining a place at Queen Elizabeth’s School, the following articles will be useful:

 

 

It is imperative that your son steps into the exam room feeling confident and prepared. Consider using practice exam papers to give him that boost.

 

For the Queen Elizabeth’s School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following practice papers:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith website

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School (QEGS) is a co-educational grammar located in Penrith, Cumbria. The school has academy status and teaches more than 800 pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1564, QEGS moved from its original location in 1917 and remains Cumbria’s only grammar school.

 

Pupils can choose to participate in a variety of lunchtime and after school activities including sport, drama and even a French film club.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith

 

 

Address: Queen Elizabeth Grammar School, Ullswater Road, Penrith CA11 7EG

County: Cumbria

Admissions Info: reception@qegs.cumbria.sch.uk, 01768 864621

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 833 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date(s): July and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

With 120 places available in Year 7, admission to QEGS is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Before parents apply for a place at the school, it is advised that they attend either the school’s open day in July or one of its school tours in September. Parents will receive information about the admissions process at these events.

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, or when two or more applicants achieve the same test score, priority will be determined as follows:

 

  1. Children who are, or have previously been in, looked-after care
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium or Service Premium
  3. Children resident within or attending state schools within the catchment area
  4. Scores in the verbal reasoning parts of the entrance test
  5. Scores in the non-verbal reasoning parts of the entrance test

 

For more information about the QEGS admissions policy, visit their website or call 01768 864621.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith

 

 

To register your child to sit the QEGS entrance test, parents and guardians must complete the school’s application form, which can be downloaded here. To make a valid application, parents must also complete the Local Authority’s SA3 form, which can be done online. If this second form isn’t completed in time for the test date, children will be unable to sit the entrance exam.

 

Any late applications will be considered after an initial round of waiting list places have been allocated.

 

 

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School’s 11+ test is split into three papers, covering:

 

 

All three GL Assessment papers are multiple-choice and are taken on the same day. Each paper includes questions typical to the KS2 National Curriculum.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

 

With QEGS being the only grammar school in the entire county of Cumbria, it’s inevitable that there will be some competition for Year 7 places. Improve your child’s chances of success in the QEGS 11 Plus exam by being organised from the start. Read our 11 Plus guide for parents to get a helpful overview of the exam.

 

If your child has already started their 11 Plus revision and you’ve noticed some regular mistakes or specific knowledge gaps, add practice test papers into their learning sessions. Not only will practice papers familiarise your child with the layout of the exam but will also help to improve their time management.

 

For the Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following practice papers:

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle website

Located in the Lincolnshire market town of Horncastle, Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School is a co-educational grammar first established in 1327. The school specialises in Mathematics, Science and Modern Languages and gained academy status in 2012.

 

Almost 900 pupils aged 11-18 are taught a broad and balanced curriculum, while sporting achievements are placed at the centre of school life. Pupils have regular access to a range of sports facilities and can participate in many extracurricular clubs.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle

 

 


Address:
Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle, West Street, Horncastle LN9 5AD

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@qegs.lincs.sch.uk, 01507 522465

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 870 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle is part of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools. With 120 places available in Year 7, in the event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children who reach the required standard for entry.
  2. Children who have reached the qualifying standard for entry and who are eligible for pupil premium or the service premium.
  3. Eligible children whose permanent address is within the school’s designated area for free transport with priority being given to the order of their total scores in the entrance tests.
  4. Eligible children from all other areas with priority being given to the order of their total scores in the entrance tests.

 

For more information about Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle, parents should initially visit the Local Authority (LA) website to register their child’s interest. The school will use the LA’s timetable for applications and parents should be aware that if children meet the qualifying standard at 11+, this does not automatically guarantee a place in the school.

 

Parents will receive results via post in October and in March the following year, the LA will send out offers of places based on the preferences submitted on the application form.

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus test for Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 35-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five equal sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar is a popular selective school in Lincolnshire, so to give your child the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place, you must invest time and resources into their 11 Plus revision. While it’s understandable that some children worry about sitting their 11+, if they have a good revision timetable in place from the beginning and get plenty of practice, there shouldn’t be anything to be worried about.

 

The 11 Plus at Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle focuses on reasoning skills, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

Practice exam papers are an effective way to increase your child’s confidence for the 11+, as they allow children to better understand the layout of the exam and the types of questions they will have to answer. Our 11+ practice papers for reasoning cover all the required question types that your child will face in the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle exam. Once the test is complete, you will receive immediate scored feedback, allowing you to track their progress easily.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar exam. We would specifically recommend the following practice resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School website

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford (QEGS) is a co-educational school with academy status situated in Lincolnshire. Founded in 1566, the school teaches approximately 550 pupils aged 11-18.

 

Prior to becoming a grammar school, Queen Elizabeth’s was a business and enterprise college and to this today it encourages its pupils to learn business skills by setting up their own private businesses while studying. The school also understands the importance of extracurricular activities and students regularly participate in clubs and school trips across the world.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford

 

 

Address: Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Alford, Station Road, Alford LN13 9HY

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: reception@qegs.co.uk, 01507 462403

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 550 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 84

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. QEGS fully complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated admission arrangements for Year 7 and is part of Lincolnshire Grammar Schools’ Consortium.

 

Compared to other grammar schools in Lincolnshire, QEGS Alford has a relatively small number of places available in Year 7, with just 84. Therefore, in the likely event that the school is oversubscribed, it will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after children who achieve the required score
  2. Children living within the school’s designated free transport area who achieve the required score
  3. Children who do not live within the school’s designated free transport area but attend the primary schools within it and who achieve the required score
  4. Pupils not living in the designated free transport area or attending a primary school in this area who achieve the required score

 

Further explanation of the school’s admissions process and its free transport area boundaries can be found via the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s admission arrangements. Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) and apply directly via the local authority (LA) website to register their child for a 11 Plus exam place.

 

Those living outside of Lincolnshire must return their CAF form to their own LA, who will forward the application to Lincolnshire LA.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Prospective pupils to Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford must sit two 11 Plus exams. These exams are multiple-choice and will test students on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this is a 50-minute test that consists of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning – this is a 40-minute test that consists of 70 questions and is split into five sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Giving your child plenty of time to study for the exams will help improve their confidence and allow you to identify any knowledge gaps. If you find these gaps sooner rather than later, you’ll have more time to improve them ahead of the marked exam.

 

Help your child to prepare for the 11 Plus exam by creating a study plan that’s achievable. Allow them down-time for relaxation and opt for short bursts of study practice often, compared with more irregular, lengthy sessions.

 

Our 11 Plus Guide for Parents will answer any further questions you have about the test. As the school focuses on reasoning skills, your child should also benefit from the advice given in these articles:

 

 

Consider introducing practice exam papers into your child’s revision sessions. We offer several 11+ practice tests that can help your child to prepare for the QEGS 11 Plus exam. We would specifically recommend the following useful resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Poole Grammar School website

Located in Dorset, on the south coast of England, Poole Grammar School (PGS) is an all-boys’ grammar for pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1904, PGS is an academy and specialises in mathematics and computing.

 

Around 1,000 boys enjoy first-class facilities on campus. Sports are a major part of life at PGS and the school boasts a number of playing fields within its grounds. Poole Grammar School provides a well-rounded education that recognises the importance of academic achievement, while allowing pupils to explore various social and cultural activities.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Poole Grammar School

 

 

Address: Poole Grammar School, Gravel Hill, Poole BH17 9JU

County: Dorset

Admissions Info: pgsoffice@poolegrammar.com, 01202 692132

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 997 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Poole Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Year 7 places at Poole Grammar School are determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Before applying for one of the 180 places available, parents and prospective pupils are encouraged to attend PGS’s open event in July. This will give you a chance to meet current pupils, teaching staff and learn more about the admissions process.

 

All four grammar schools in Dorset, including PGS, share the same admissions process. Year 7 admission is coordinated by Dorset’s Consortium. Should the school receive more applications than available places, as per previous years, the following oversubscription criteria are applied, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after boys
  2. Boys living within the Borough of Poole who receive Pupil Premium
  3. Boys living within the Borough of Poole and who do not receive Pupil Premium
  4. Boys whose parents are currently PGS staff members
  5. Boys who live outside the Borough of Poole who receive Pupil Premium
  6. Boys who live outside the Borough of Poole who do not receive Pupil Premium

 

For further details about Poole Grammar School’s admissions process, visit the school website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Poole Grammar School

 

 

To register your son for the Poole Grammar School 11 Plus exam, you must complete the Common Poole Grammar form, which will be available via the school’s website when the registration period opens.

 

Once your son sits the exam, you must apply to the Borough of Poole directly. Late applications will only be considered once the main application round has been completed.

 

 

Poole Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam at Poole Grammar School consists of three multiple-choice tests, administered by GL Assessment, split into the following subjects:

 

  • Mathematics – this 50-minute test covers aspects from the KS2 curriculum
  • English – this 45-minute tests covers comprehension, vocabulary and punctuation
  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is designed to analyse a pupil’s academic potential and is based on a fixed set of question types

 

How to Prepare for the Poole Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Parents should be prepared to start their child’s 11 Plus revision well ahead of the actual exam. Poole Grammar School’s 11+ exam tests a number of subjects, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

 

Practice exam papers are a proven, effective way of increasing your child’s confidence for Poole Grammar School’s 11+. They can help your son become more familiar with the structure, content and layout of the exams and better understand the types of questions they may be asked.

 

As the exam draws nearer, try to include timed practice papers in your child’s learning routine. Answering questions under timed conditions can help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering quickly.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests are specifically designed to help your child prepare for the Poole Grammar School exam. We recommend the following:

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics Problem Solving

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11 + English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

The information provided about Poole Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Plymouth High School for Girls website

Founded in 1874, Plymouth High School for Girls (PHSG) is a Devon-based girls’ only grammar. The school’s specialist subjects are Mathematics, Science, Design Technology and Information Technology and it also has training school status.

 

The school’s 800+ pupils are divided across four houses: Anthony, Kendall, Latimer and Temple. These play a significant role in school life as students represent their houses to compete in numerous events. PHSG offers a supportive community, while encouraging students to be confident in their pursuit of knowledge.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bournemouth School

 

 

Address: Plymouth High School for Girls, St Lawrence Road, Plymouth PL4 6HT

County: Devon

Admissions Info: phs@phsg.org, 01752 208308

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 826 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Test One: GL Assessment | Test Two: Part GL Assessment and part set by school

 

 

Plymouth High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Plymouth High School for Girls is open to 120 pupils in Year 7. Admission to PHSG at this stage is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open event in September. This is a good opportunity to ask staff members and current pupils any questions you may have before applying to PHSG.

 

Once your daughter has taken the entrance exam, an application needs to be made through your local authority’s application system. In most cases, applications can be made online through your local authority’s website.

 

PHSG usually receives more applicants than there are available places in Year 7. If this is the case, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after children who achieve the qualifying score
  2. Candidates who qualify for Pupil Premium and who achieve the qualifying score (up to 12 places)
  3. Other candidates who achieve the qualifying score for the particular year of entry or a mark above it by rank order of standardised score

 

Get more information on PHSG’s website about the Year 7 admissions process.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Plymouth High School for Girls

 

 

Parents of students who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests at Plymouth High School for Girls must register with Plymouth County Council, before the exam date.

 

Prospective PHSG pupils will sit the entrance exams in September and offer letters will be issued in March the following year.

 

Plymouth High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Plymouth High School for Girls’ 11 Plus exam consists of three papers, taken over two testing days:

 

  1. English, set by GL Assessment, this test is multiple-choice and focuses on comprehension and English skills. This exam is taken on the first testing day.
  2. Mathematics, set by GL Assessment, this test is also multiple-choice. This exam is taken on the second testing day.
  3. Creative writing paper, set by the school. This exam is taken on the second testing day.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Plymouth High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

While it’s understandable that some children can feel pressure in the lead-up to their 11+, we’re here to tell you that it needn’t be the case. You can keep your child’s stress levels to a minimum by being organised from the outset and providing your daughter with the right resources. Our 11 Plus guide for parents is a great place to start when collating exam information.

 

Practice exam papers should form an integral part of your daughter’s 11 Plus preparation. These will give her an understanding of the exam layout and structure, which will go a long way towards making her feel more comfortable under exam conditions.

 

For the Plymouth High School for Girls’ 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following GL-style practice resources:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

 

The information provided about Plymouth High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Pate’s Grammar School website

Cheltenham-based Pate’s Grammar School is a co-educational facility available to pupils aged 11-18. A Beacon School, Pate’s was founded in 1574 and became an academy in 2010. Recognised by Ofsted as ‘Beyond Outstanding’, Pate’s regularly appears towards the top of the UK’s best secondary school league tables.

 

Despite a challenging academic curriculum, Pate’s also recognises the importance of nurturing pupils’ more creative and sporting abilities. As such, the school offers a wide range of extracurricular activities, including music and drama.

 

There is plenty of musical talent at Pate’s; watch this short video from a recent concert featuring some of its music pupils:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Pate’s Grammar School

 

 

Address: Pate’s Grammar School, Princess Elizabeth Way, Cheltenham GL51 0HG

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: office@patesgs.org, 01242 523169

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 995 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: September / October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)

 

 

Pate’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for one of the 150 Year 7 places at Pate’s Grammar School, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. Pate’s school admissions are centrally-coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council and parents who wish their child to sit the 11+ test for the school must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form via the school’s website, when registration is open

 

With an average of three applications for every place at Year 7 at Pate’s, in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to:

 

  • Looked after children or previously looked after children
  • Children entitled to Pupil Premium
  • Other ‘qualified’ children, in test rank order, until 150 places are filled

 

Pate’s website can offer you further information about the school’s admissions process if required.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Pate’s Grammar School

 

 

Pate’s Grammar School uses the same 11 Plus test from CEM (Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring) as the other six grammar schools in Gloucestershire. For your child to be considered for a Year 7 place at Pate’s, you must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online via your Local Authority (LA) and a test registration form, available via the school’s website during the registration period.

 

For your child to be considered for a place at Pate’s, you must include the school as one of your ranked choices on the CAF if they have reached the Qualifying Standard in the 11+ exam, otherwise your child will not be considered for entry.

 

Parents will receive results from the 11 Plus as soon as possible after the exam and the LA will send out official place allocations in March of the following year.

 

 

Pate’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Pate’s Grammar School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam by University of Durham. This test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:

 

 

Both tests are taken on the same day and each last 45-50 minutes.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Pate’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

To allay any concerns your child has about sitting the 11+ exam for Pate’s, work together on building a thorough revision timetable in the lead-up to the test. This timetable is the first step in giving your child the best possible chance of gaining a place at Pate’s. Additional revision sessions around the usual homework can lead to unrest and boredom in some children, so you may wish to introduce fun revision games to encourage motivation.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective revision tool for the Pate’s Grammar School 11 Plus. These papers are an excellent way of improving your child’s time management skills, especially if taken under timed conditions. The more papers that are taken in this manner, the more your child will become familiar with the test layout and how quickly they will be required to answer questions in the exam.

 

For the Pate’s 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following CEM resources:

 

 

The information provided about Pate’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Parkstone Grammar School website

Founded in 1905, Parkstone Grammar School (PGS) is a selective school for girls aged 11-18. Situated in the coastal town of Poole, Dorset, PGS gained academy status in 2011 and specialises in science and languages.

 

The school offers its 1,250 girls a broad and balanced education and aims to foster a love of learning while promoting independence for life after school. PGS actively promotes pupil health and wellbeing with a range of extracurricular sports and a healthy eating programme.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Parkstone Grammar School

 

 

Address: Parkstone Grammar School, Sopers Lane, Poole BH17 7EP

County: Dorset

Admissions Info: enquiries@parkstone.poole.sch.uk, 01202 605605

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,250 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Parkstone Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All 180 Year 7 places at Parkstone Grammar School are determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Should you have any questions about the admission process prior to applying for a place, the school welcomes parents and prospective students to its open evening, which takes place in July. Please contact the school directly on 01202 605605 to arrange.

 

Admission to PGS in Year 7 follows the procedure as agreed by the coordinated admission arrangements for Dorset’s Consortium. Therefore, should parents wish their children to be considered for admission to more than one selective school in the Consortium, they will take just one test.

 

Although the 11+ exam is the same across every school in the area, each has its own admissions oversubscription criteria. Parkstone Grammar gives priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after girls
  2. Girls who live within the Borough of Poole and who are currently entitled to the Pupil Premium
  3. Girls who live within the Borough of Poole
  4. Girls who live outside the Borough of Poole and who are currently entitled to the Pupil Premium
  5. Girls who live outside the Borough of Poole, in rank order of the entrance test scores, with those girls obtaining the highest scores given higher priority

 

For more information on Parkstone Grammar School’s admission criteria, please visit its website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Parkstone Grammar School

 

 

Parents who want to register their child with the school can do so by completing an online registration form via the Borough of Poole’s website.

 

Parents should note that late applications will not be dealt with until all other applications have been considered and the allocation of offers has been completed.

 

Exam results are sent out in October, at which point, you should complete your Local Authority form to apply for a place at Parkstone Grammar School.

 

 

Parkstone Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam at Parkstone Grammar School consists of three multiple-choice tests, administered by GL Assessment, covering the following subjects:

 

 

Each test lasts for 50 minutes and is based on the KS2 curriculum.


How to Prepare for the Parkstone Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Our guide to the 11+ is specifically for parents who have questions about the exam and is an excellent starting point ahead of your daughter’s revision.

 

There are numerous advantages to starting your daughter’s 11 Plus revision early; the more time she dedicates to studying for it, the more time she will have to improve any knowledge gaps ahead of the exam. By allocating time for short revision sessions, there is less chance of your daughter over-stretching herself, which can lead to burnout and a lack of motivation.

 

A keystone to your daughter’s 11 Plus learning will be introducing practice exam papers into her study routine. Your child is more likely to perform well in the Parkstone Grammar School 11+ if she is familiar with the test’s layout and has a good understanding of the types of questions she might be asked.

 

We have several useful and effective 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the content and style of the Parkstone Grammar School 11 Plus exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11 + English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics Problem Solving

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

The information provided about Parkstone Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Oakwood Park Grammar School website

Founded in 1918, Oakwood Park Grammar School (OPGS) is a boys’ grammar based in the Kent town of Maidstone. It has a co-educational sixth form. In 2003, the school became a mathematics and computing specialist college before gaining academy status in May 2011.

 

Pupils across five houses participate in a range of extracurricular activities, including sports at local, county and national levels. Pupils enjoy good music and drama facilities on campus and take part in an annual school-wide volunteering day to help the surrounding community.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Oakwood Park Grammar School

 

 

Address: Oakwood Park Grammar School, Oakwood Park, Maidstone ME16 8AH

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@opgs.org, 01622 726683

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,016 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

Oakwood Park Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Oakwood Park Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. With 160 Year 7 places available at OPGS, competition for entry is high. In the case of oversubscription, the school uses the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Children with a sibling that already attends the school
  3. Children with health issues and special access requirements
  4. Children who live closest to the school

 

Parents of students who are not awarded a grammar school place at OPGS have a right to appeal. You should lodge this appeal with the school directly, within 20 school days of the date of notification.

 

The school’s website offers further information about the admissions process.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Oakwood Park Grammar School

 

 

Oakwood’s Year 7 admissions are coordinated by Kent County Council, the Local Authority (LA). To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete an online registration form.

 

Once your son has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it online to Kent County Council. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the Council in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March the following year.

 

 

Oakwood Park Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Oakwood Park Grammar School follows the Kent 11 Plus exam format, which is split into the following sections:

 

  • Section 1:  A one-hour exam that aims to test students’ reasoning abilities. It is broken down into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  • Section 2: An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
  • Section 3: A 40-minute writing task. While not marked as part of the overall 11 Plus score, it can be used as evidence for both borderline cases and in appeals for a grammar school place.

 

How to Prepare for the Oakwood Park Grammar School11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Kent is known as the largest and most competitive grammar school area in the UK, so to keep your son ahead of his competition, he must start his revision for the 11 Plus early. Begin by creating an easy-to-follow revision timetable that covers all the required subjects, while also allowing time for relaxation to ensure your son doesn’t become overworked and anxious about the exam. Factoring in hobbies means your son is much more likely to remain motivated throughout his revision periods.

 

For the Kent 11+ Test, practice exam papers should be an essential part of your child’s revision routine as they can help you monitor their progress. They also give children a much-needed confidence boost as the exam date approaches.

 

We have specifically designed the following practice resources for the Kent Test:

 

 

If your son needs additional practice in a particular subject, or responds better to practice papers than regular revision sessions, we would also suggest the following:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

 

The information provided about Oakwood Park Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Founded in 1938, Nonsuch High School for Girls is an all-girls’ grammar school situated in Cheam, the London borough of Sutton. An academy school, Nonsuch has also gained specialist science and language school status.

 

Over 1,200 pupils are divided into seven houses and are randomly picked to be in each house. Nonsuch High School actively encourages its pupils to participate in fields where women are underrepresented, such as science, technology and engineering.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Nonsuch High School for Girls

 

 

Address: Nonsuch High School for Girls, Ewell Road, Cheam, Sutton SM3 8AB

County: London (Borough of Sutton)

Admissions Info: office@nonsuch.sutton.sch.uk, 020 8394 3400

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,242 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 210

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Part One: S.E.T/ Part Two: Set by school

 

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls is part of Sutton’s Coordinated Admissions Scheme. Entry to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET). With 210 places available in Year 7, the school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open events, which usually take place in July. At the open day, you can learn more about the admissions process and will have the opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.

 

In the likely event that the school should receive more applications than there are places, the school applies this oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after children
  2. Children eligible for Pupil Premium or Service Premium (up to 10 places)
  3. Children who obtain the highest score in the entrance exam, irrespective of home address (85 places)
  4. Children within the school’s catchment area who achieve the qualifying score (110 places)

 

Parents are advised to thoroughly read Nonsuch High School for Girls’ strict admissions policy before taking their daughter’s application further.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Nonsuch High School for Girls

 

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the SET (part one) must complete a Supplementary Form initially, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open. Only one form needs to be completed, even if you are applying to more than one school in the Sutton area.

 

If your daughter is successful in the SET, she will be invited to sit Nonsuch’s Second Stage Entrance Examination. Should your daughter pass this test, you must include Nonsuch High School for Girls on your Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) to be eligible for consideration for a place.

 

Parents will be informed of the outcome of the SET in late September.

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

In previous years, the test has been split into two stages:

 

  • Stage 1: Maths and English, both multiple-choice
  • Stage 2: Maths and English. Neither of these are multiple-choice and previous exams have included comprehension, a writing task and a standard maths test.

 

Each test paper includes questions typical to the KS2 national curriculum.

 

How to Prepare for the Nonsuch High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

None of the five fully-selective grammar schools in Sutton, including Nonsuch High School for Girls, reveal details about their exam provider. While this can offer an even playing field among applicants, it can cause unnecessary worry for both children and parents.

 

However, with Exam Papers Plus, you can be sure that your child has a great chance of success in securing a Year 7 place at Nonsuch High School. Start your child’s revision plan early and include online practice papers to help identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.

 

Nonsuch High School has reported that they receive over eight applications for each Year 7 place, so fierce competition is to be expected. To put your daughter ahead of that competition, we would recommend using the following practice papers, specifically designed for the S.E.T:

 

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 1

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 2 

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 3

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 4

 

If you would like further subject-specific practice, the following papers will prove useful:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

For the second stage, the following maths papers will prove useful:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

The information provided about Nonsuch High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Newstead Wood School website

Located in the London town of Orpington, Newstead Wood was founded in 1957 and gained academy status in 2011. A selective all-girls’ school, Newstead Wood teaches over 1,000 girls aged 11-18. The school specialises in engineering and languages and has been previously described by Ofsted as “an outstandingly successful school”.

 

Newstead Wood offers its pupils the opportunity to travel during their school life; watch this short video from the school’s 2017 trip to Borneo:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Newstead Wood

 

 

Address: Newstead Wood School, Avebury Road, Orpington BR6 9SA

County: London (Bromley)

Admissions Info: office@newsteadwood.bromley.sch.uk, 01689 853626

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,012 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Newstead Wood 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Newstead Wood School for Year 7 is by academic selection, via an 11 Plus exam. The school is regularly oversubscribed, with an average of eight applications for every one place at Year 7. Parents and students are encouraged to attend the school’s open day in September to ensure that the school is the correct environment for prospective pupils before applying for a place.

 

It is highly likely that there will be more applicants than available places in Year 7. The school ranks the top scorers in the 11+ selection tests and ranks them in order, giving priority to:

 

  1. Girls who live within a 9-mile radius of the school
  2. Daughters of a staff member that has been employed at the school for more than two years at the time of application
  3. Girls who do not meet the above conditions

 

Parents should be aware that, to date, no places have ever been offered to applicants from group #3, due to the high volume of applications that Newstead Wood receives.

 

For more information about Newstead Wood’s admissions process, visit the school’s website directly.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Newstead Wood

 

 

To apply for a place at Newstead Wood School, parents must first complete their Local Authority (LA) Application Form and state the school as one of their preferences.

 

Parents must return the Common Application Form (CAF) to their LA within the registration period. Secondly, parents must also complete Newstead Wood’s own Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which can be downloaded from the school’s website.

 

Parents will receive the results of the tests via post by mid-October.

 

 

Newstead Wood 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Girls will sit two tests in the following subjects:

 

 

Both these tests are multiple-choice and take between 40 – 50 minutes each.

 

The scores achieved by girls in the tests will be age adjusted and placed in ranked order based on the total score achieved.

 

How to Prepare for the Newstead Wood 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Newstead Wood School has an excellent reputation and consistently ranks highly in UK grammar school league tables. With this in mind, it’s inevitable that competition for Year 7 places will be high.

 

The school looks for pupils to have good reasoning skills and its two-part 11 Plus test will challenge many girls. Students should focus on both Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning skills in order to have a complete knowledge and understanding of the types of questions that may be asked.

 

If your daughter is due to sit the Newstead Wood School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Newstead Wood School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Mayfield Grammar School website

Mayfield Grammar School is a girls’ school located in the Kent town of Gravesend. The school teaches almost 1,000 pupils aged 11-18, with boys welcomed into the sixth form from age 16. Founded in 1914, Mayfield Grammar is an academy school with Specialist Science and Languages College status.

 

The school aims to provide a challenging academic schedule while simultaneously encouraging pupils to develop their personal talents through a range of extracurricular activities, such as art, drama and music.

 

For an insight into life at Mayfield Grammar School, watch this short promotional video from 2014 about its sixth form:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Mayfield Grammar School

 

 

Address: Mayfield Grammar School, Pelham Road, Gravesend DA11 0JE

County: Kent

Admissions Info: enquiries@mgsg.kent.sch.uk, 01474 352 896

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 996 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test / Mayfield Procedure (optional)

 

Mayfield Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Mayfield Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. The school also admits girls through an optional test, the Mayfield Procedure, which is taken when girls have been unsuccessful in the Kent Test.

 

With 180 Year 7 places available at Mayfield, competition is high. In the case of oversubscription, the school gives priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children
  2. Children with a sibling attending the school at the time of application
  3. Eligible children who reside in these postcode areas: DA3, DA4, DA9, DA10, DA11, DA12, DA13, ME3.
  4. Eligible children who reside in these postcode areas: DA1, DA2, ME2, TN13, TN14, TN15.
  5. Eligible children who do not reside in the areas as detailed in the third or fourth criteria

 

Parents are advised to check Mayfield Grammar School’s admissions process via the school’s website, as further information may become available.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Mayfield Grammar School

 

 

As Mayfield Grammar School uses the Kent 11+ Test as a means of selection at Year 7, parents must register online with the Kent Local Authority (LA). Parents also have the option of registering their daughter for the Mayfield Procedure, which provides another opportunity for gaining a place in Year 7.

 

If you would like your daughter to sit this test, parents must download a registration form from the school’s website once registration is open in June. The school admits girls through the Mayfield procedure when a child has been unsuccessful in the Kent testing process.

 

Parents will receive results through the post in mid-October and can access the Kent Test result via the LA’s website.

 

 

Mayfield Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Most Kent-based selective schools require pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam, including Mayfield Grammar. The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests:

 

  1. This is an hour-long exam, divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
  2. This is a 60-minute test that focuses on reasoning. It is divided into three sections:

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task, which will not form part of the final 11 Plus result but can be used in any borderline or appeal cases.

 

Prepare your daughter for the Kent Test with these sample questions and some further explanation about what to expect from the exam.

 

The Mayfield Procedure also consists of two parts:

 

  1. A computer-based test focusing on verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning and non-verbal reasoning.
  2. An English paper to assess reading and writing skills.

 

How to Prepare for the Mayfield Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Your daughter can be confident and calm going into the Mayfield Grammar School 11 Plus exam if she is thoroughly prepared and has a good understanding of what to expect from the exam structure. Children at this age tend to learn more quickly if revision sessions are split into manageable chunks, as opposed to longer, more irregular sessions.

 

Ensure that your daughter has everything she needs to perform well in the Kent Test by using practice papers. If you add these into your daughter’s study plan early on, you will be able to identify any areas that need more work.

 

To help your daughter gain a Year 7 place at Mayfield Grammar School, we have created three practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

 

Once your daughter has completed these, you might notice she needs additional help in particular subjects, so why not try one of our practice exam papers below under timed conditions?

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Mayfield Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Marling School 11 Plus exam

Located in the Gloucestershire market town of Stroud, Marling School is a boys-only grammar for pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1887, Marling School became an academy in 2011. Over 800 boys are educated at the school and given the opportunity to participate in a range of extracurricular activities to support their personal development.

 

The school has a reputation for encouraging pupils with musical ability. To learn more about Marling’s music department, watch this video showcasing its 2017 music competition:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Marling School

 

 

Address: Marling School, Cainscross Road, Stroud GL5 4HE

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: admissions@marling.gloucs.sch.uk, 01453 762251

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 846 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: October/April/June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)
 

Marling School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Your son must reach the required standard in the 11 Plus exam to be in with a chance of gaining one of Marling School’s 150 Year 7 places. All of Marling’s admissions are coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council. Parents who wish their son to sit the 11+ test must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form, which can be found on the school’s website, when registration is open.

 

Marling has an average of three applications for every place at Year 7, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to looked after, or previously looked after children who achieve the required standard. Should there be any ties for places, the admissions authority allocates places at random.

 

To find out more about Marling School’s admissions process, please visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Marling School

 

 

Marling School is one of seven grammar schools in Gloucestershire that use the same 11 Plus test from the Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). For your son to be considered for a place at Marling School, you must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online via the Local Authority and a test registration form, which is available online via the school website. Marling must be stated as one of your preferred school choices on the CAF in order to be considered.

 

Parents will receive results in October and if your son meets the qualifying standard at 11+, you can apply for a Year 7 place at Marling School.

 

Marling School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Since 2013, Marling School has used the CEM 11 Plus exam by the University of Durham. The test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning (including English)
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Numerical Reasoning (Maths)

 

Both tests are taken on the same day and each last 45-50 minutes.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Marling School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

If your son is worried about sitting his 11 Plus exam, the best way to help him is to prepare a thorough revision timetable. For your son to have the best chance of securing one of Marling School’s 150 Year 7 places, he must invest time into studying for the tests. Keep him motivated with fun revision games to suit his preferred style of learning and he’ll soon adapt to any additional revision that’s required.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective revision technique for the Marling School 11 Plus. The earlier you start with practice papers, the sooner you will be aware of any weaker subject areas. The papers will not only familiarise your son with the layout of the exam but will help to improve his time management skills.

 

For the Marling School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Marling School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Loreto Grammar School website

Founded in 1909, Loreto Grammar School is an all-girls Catholic grammar based in Altrincham, Trafford. It became an academy in 2012 and currently teaches over 1,000 girls. The school prides itself on its international links, with over 120 Loreto schools worldwide and sister schools in India, Australia and Spain.

 

Loreto Grammar School provides its pupils with an education to help shape their faith, while aiming to encourage them to seek leadership roles after their education is complete.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Loreto Grammar School

 

 

Address: Loreto Grammar School, Dunham Road, Altrincham WA14 4AH

County: Greater Manchester (Altrincham)

Admissions Info: admissions@loretogrammar.co.uk, 0161 928 3703

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,051 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Loreto Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

There are currently 150 places allocated to Year 7 pupils at Loreto Grammar School. Each of these places are awarded based on performance in the 11 Plus exam.

A school rooted in tradition, it encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open day in July, to learn more about the admissions process, take a tour of the school and ensure that it is the right environment for your daughter’s next stage of education.

 

Applications must be made online and late applications will not be considered. Loreto Grammar is a popular school and competition for entry is high. Should there be more applicants than available places in Year 7, Loreto uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Baptised, Roman Catholic, looked-after girls and previously looked-after girls
  2. Baptised, Roman Catholic girls who have sisters in the school at the time of admission
  3. Baptised, Roman Catholic girls who attend an associated Primary School and live in a nominated Local Pastoral Area
  4. Other Baptised Roman Catholic girls
  5. Other looked-after girls and previously looked-after girls
  6. Baptised girls of other denominations
  7. Other girls

 

For more information about Loreto Grammar School’s admission process, please consult the school website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Loreto Grammar School

 

 

Parents of students who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must do so with the school before the exam date. Once registration is open, the relevant form can be completed online via the school’s website. Parents must supply their daughter’s baptism certificate in order to complete the registration process. Late applications will not be considered.

 

Parents must include Loreto as a preferred choice on their Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) in order for their daughter to be eligible for a Year 7 place at the school.

 

 

Loreto Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Prospective pupils to Loreto Grammar School must sit three tests at 11+:

 

  • Maths – this paper is written and set by the school and lasts approximately 45 minutes. Its structure can be considered similar to that of a SATs paper.
  • Verbal Reasoning – this paper is set by GL Assessment, is multiple-choice and lasts 50 minutes.
  • English – this paper is also set by GL Assessment, is multiple-choice and lasts 45 minutes.

 

Parents will be notified of the test results in October, which will indicate whether the student has attained the required score to be eligible for admission. However, place allocations will not be made public until March the following year and passing the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of entry to the school.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Loreto Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

When it comes to the 11 Plus exam, regular practice is key. To give your daughter the best chance of performing well and gaining a place at Loreto, they should incorporate practice papers into their study. Regular exposure to these types of papers could increase your daughter’s chance of achieving the required score in the 11 Plus.

 

It’s important to identify gaps in your daughter’s knowledge quickly; the sooner you recognise where additional work is needed, the less chance there is of her feeling overworked as the exam date approaches. Allocate any additional time to these gaps via a study plan and focus on the best revision techniques that work for your daughter’s learning style.

 

Encourage your daughter to sit practice papers under timed conditions, as this will vastly improve her time management skills and get her used to answering all required questions within the timeframe.

 

For the Loreto Grammar School 11+, we would specifically recommend the following resources for your daughter:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ English: Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving (GL)

11+ Mathematics: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Mathematics: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Mathematics: Pack 3 (GL)

 

 

The information provided about Loreto Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Maidstone Grammar School for Girls website

Founded in 1887, Maidstone Grammar School for Girls (known as MGGS), is a selective girls’ grammar, with boys allocated places in the school’s sixth form. The school originally opened with just 18 pupils and today educates 1,200 students.

 

Pupils are split into six houses: Britons, Danes, Normans, Romans, Saxons and Vikings, and compete in various annual competitions in an effort to win the house cup.

 

For an insight into academic life at Maidstone Grammar School for Girls, watch this short promotional video from 2011:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Maidstone Grammar School for Girls

 

 

Address: Maidstone Grammar School for Girls, Buckland Road, Maidstone ME16 0SF

County: Kent

Admissions Info: central@mggs.org, 01622 752 103

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,217 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: October/June/July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL)

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be eligible for a Year 7 place at Maidstone Grammar School for Girls, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. The test exists to assess whether a grammar school education is the right option for your daughter.

 

With 180 Year 7 places available, competition for entry is high. In the case of over-subscription, the school uses the following criteria, giving priority to:

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Current Family Association (a sibling attending the school when the child starts)
  3. Health and Special Access Reasons
  4. Proximity of child’s home to school

 

For more information on Maidstone Grammar School’s admission criteria, please visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Maidstone Grammar School for Girls

 

 

To apply for Year 7 entry to MGGS, parents must register online with Kent Local Authority (LA).

 

Once your daughter has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council – this can usually be done online. The Council will send assessment decisions to parents in October and offers will be sent out on National Offer Day in March the following year.

 

If you have any further queries about Maidstone Grammar School for Girls’ admissions process, email the school central@mggs.org or call 01622 752 103.

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School for Girls requires pupils to take the Kent 11 Plus exam, which consists of two multiple-choice tests. The first test is one-hour long and is split into two sections, English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

The second test is a reasoning paper and is split into three sections:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Spatial Reasoning

 

This 60-minute test is broken up into smaller sections.

 

Prospective pupils will also be required to sit a 40-minute writing task. This is not marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but it may be used in grammar school appeal cases.

 

The Kent 11 Plus Exam: How to Prepare Your Child for Success

 

How to Prepare for the Maidstone Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

While the Kent Test varies from year to year, all children will benefit from good preparation for their 11 Plus exam. Whatever your child’s current level, they will need to invest additional time for revision. For the Maidstone Grammar School for Girls’ 11+ test, we would recommend using practice exam papers as part of that revision. Practice papers give your daughter a clearer idea of the types of questions she can expect in the real exam and they will quickly highlight any subject areas that need additional focus.

 

Gaining a Year 7 place at a Kent-based grammar school can be difficult, but with the right preparation, your daughter needn’t be worried about her 11 Plus. We have designed three practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

 

You may wish to also integrate subject-specific practice using the resource packs below:

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Maidstone Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Maidstone Grammar School website

Maidstone Grammar School was originally founded in 1549 to teach Latin grammar to the children of Maidstone. Now, it is a boys’ grammar school that teaches over 1,200 pupils, with girls admitted into the school’s sixth form.

 

The school has won both a Language College award and a Healthy School award and, in 2011, the school introduced an Applied Learning Centre, allowing pupils access to facilities such as editing suites.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Maidstone Grammar School

 

 

Address: Maidstone Grammar School, Barton Road, Maidstone ME15 7BT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: school@mgs-kent.org.uk, 01622 752101

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,276 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 205

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Maidstone Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test.

 

With 205 Year 7 places available at Maidstone, competition for entry is high. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Qualifying pupils who are looked-after or previously looked-after children
  2. Children resident in one of the parishes listed here, achieving at least a mark halfway between the pass mark and the maximum marks available in the Kent Test
  3. Other qualifying children resident in one of the listed parishes
  4. Qualifying children who have siblings at the school, and those who live within the closest proximity to the school

 

Parents of students who are not awarded a grammar school place at Maidstone have a right to appeal, and in the first instance, must write to The Clerk to the Governors, care of the school.

 

For more information about Maidstone Grammar School’s admissions process, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Maidstone Grammar School

 

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete an online registration form.

 

Once your son has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the Council in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March the following year.

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Most Kent-based selective schools require pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam; this Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

Paper 1: This is an hour-long exam, split into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

Paper 2: This is a 60-minute test, focusing on reasoning and is split into three sections:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning
  • Spatial reasoning

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task, which might be referred to during borderline or appeal cases.

 

If your son is going to sit the Kent Test, read our article on how to prepare him for the exam, including some sample questions.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Maidstone Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As Kent is the largest and most competitive grammar school area in England, it’s imperative to make the most of the time and resources available to your son in the lead-up to the Kent Test if he is going to secure a Year 7 place at Maidstone Grammar School.

 

Your son must be thoroughly prepared and know what to expect from the exam structure and content. One of the most effective ways of improving your son’s performance in the exam is to use practice papers. These papers are a good way of highlighting weaker areas quickly, so introduce them early in your child’s revision for the 11 Plus.

 

To help your son gain a Year 7 place at Maidstone Grammar School, we have created and extensively tested three practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

Also, if your son needs additional practice ahead of his 11+, try a selection of our subject-specific practice exam papers below:

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Maidstone Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of The Latymer School 11 Plus exam

Based in Edmonton, Greater London, The Latymer School is a selective, co-educational grammar. Founded in 1624, it is the only grammar school in Enfield and currently teaches over 1,300 pupils aged 11-18. In recent years, The Latymer School has featured near the top of league tables and is considered one of the UK’s best state schools.

 

Pupils are split across six houses that compete with each other throughout the school year in a variety of competitions including drama, arts and sport. The winning house lays claim to the house trophy, the Dormer Shield.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Latymer School

 

 

Address: Latymer School, Haselbury Road, London N9 9TN

County: Hertfordshire/London Borough of Enfield

Admissions Info: office@latymer.co.uk, 0208 807 4037

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,369

Number of Places in Year 7: 186

Open Day Date: June

Exam Dates: July (Round One) and September (Round Two)

Exam Board Type: Part One: GL Assessment / Part Two: set by the school

 

 

The Latymer School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to The Latymer School for Year 7 is by academic selection, following an 11 Plus exam. The school receives over 10 applications for every Year 7 place. Parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s tours to ensure that Latymer is a good fit for the pupil before applying for a place.

 

In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Pupils with an Education Health & Care Plan
  2. A looked after child or previously looked after child
  3. A maximum of 20 applicants from the ‘Inner Area’ who show exceptional musical talent
  4. Students from the ‘inner area’ (maximum of 20) who are eligible for Pupil Premium.

 

Explanation of the ‘Inner Area’ and more details about the oversubscription criteria can be found here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Latymer School

 

 

In order to apply for a place at Latymer, parents are required to complete and return the school’s online registration form as well as the local authority common application form (CAF).

 

Parents should take note of the school and local authority’s application dates, as late applications will not be accepted. If parents do not complete the school’s entry form on time, their child will not be able to take the entrance exam.

 

 

The Latymer School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Latymer School 11+ test consists of two parts:

 

  • Part One: Mathematics and Verbal Reasoning. All applicants will be invited to take this test, which is multiple-choice and with each paper lasting for approximately 50 minutes.  This test will take place in July.

 

Following part one, only the top 650 ranked candidates in the tests will be invited to sit part two, a written English test.

 

  • Part Two: The English test is split into two sections. Section one lasts 30 minutes and will consist of a reading comprehension. Section two also lasts 30 minutes and will be a written paper, requiring pupils to tell a story and show a good level of writing skill. This test will take place in September.

 

How to Prepare for The Latymer School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As a top-performing UK grammar school, competition for Year 7 places at The Latymer School is incredibly strong. The school is looking for academic talent and has set a two-part 11+ exam to ensure candidates are challenged and examined rigorously. With a good 11 Plus study plan, your child should be able to rise to that challenge and approach the exam calmly and confidently.

 

To prepare for The Latymer School 11+, make sure your child works on their Verbal Reasoning skills and read our 11 Plus guide to maths. Whatever your child’s current attainment, they can significantly improve by using practice exam papers. Any prior practice of the skills tested in the Latymer entrance exam will be of huge advantage to your child, so review the 11+ practice papers available.

 

We have an array of practice papers specifically designed to help your child  build their confidence ahead of the Latymer School 11 Plus exam, in particular we would recommend:

 

Part 1

 

11+ GL-style Mathematics Pack 1 

11+ GL-style Mathematics Pack 2

11+ GL-style Problem Solving

11+ GL-style Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ GL-style Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

 

Part 2

 

11+ Spelling

11+ English (Open Answer) Pack 1

11+ English (Open Answer) Pack 2

 

The information provided about The Latymer School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Lawrence Sheriff School website

Founded in 1878, Lawrence Sheriff School (LSS) is a boys-only grammar located in Rugby, Warwickshire. In 2014, LSS became an academy and currently educates over 800 boys from the ages of 11-18.

 

The school has seen substantial investment in recent years to improve its facilities. It is now home to new rugby pitches and also has a regional and local table tennis centre on campus.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Lawrence Sheriff School

 

 

Address: Lawrence Sheriff School, Clifton Road, Rugby CV21 3AG

County: Warwickshire

Admissions Info: lss@lawrencesheriffschool.com, 01788 542074

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 896

Number of Places in Year 7: approximately 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

Lawrence Sheriff School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All 120 Year 7 LSS places will be allocated based on pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Before applying for a place, it is suggested that parents visit the school during its June open day. Here, parents will be able to ask questions about the admissions process and prospective pupils can learn more about the school and its learning environment.

 

Lawrence Sheriff School tends to be oversubscribed for Year 7 places, and uses the following criteria to determine priority:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children
  2. Children in receipt of the Pupil Premium (limited to 10 places)
  3. Children living in the Eastern Area of Warwickshire, who achieve the Automatic Qualifying Score or above (limited to 55 places)
  4. Children living in the priority circle (the centre of which is the Rugby Water Tower and has a radius of 10.004 miles – this also includes the Eastern Area) who achieve the Automatic Qualifying Score or above (limited to 55 places)
  5. Other children living inside or outside of the priority areas who achieve the Automatic Qualifying Score or above

 

For further information about Lawrence Sheriff School’s admission process, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Lawrence Sheriff School

 

 

The admissions service at Warwickshire County Council coordinates all Year 7 entry to Lawrence Sheriff School. This service operates the same entrance test procedure as The Grammar Schools in Birmingham Consortium.

 

To apply for entry to the school, parents must register their son for the school’s entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form (CAF). The school’s admissions policy states that late 11+ registrations will not be considered in the first round of offers.

 

Parents will be notified of results via post from mid-October and the first round of place allocations will be available from the beginning of March.

 

 

Lawrence Sheriff School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Lawrence Sheriff School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that each last 45 minutes. Both are made-up of a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Numeracy

 

Parents should be aware that the Verbal Reasoning exam has an English component, which includes a comprehension and cloze test. The Maths exam consists of a numeracy test, which focuses on mental arithmetic and problem-solving.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Lawrence Sheriff School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

For your son to have the best possible chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Warwickshire’s Lawrence Sheriff School, he must be willing to invest additional time in revision on top of his usual school work routine. The good news is that most children respond better to short bursts of revision, so just 20 minutes a day can make a real difference to your son’s knowledge and ability to prepare for the exam.

 

One of the best ways of highlighting any knowledge gaps quickly is to use practice exam papers with your son. These 11+ papers come complete with answers, enabling you to accurately measure your child’s performance and track their improvements. If your son is in the process of preparing for the Lawrence Sheriff School, we have several 11 Plus practice papers that are specifically designed to help him:

 

 

The information provided about Lawrence Sheriff School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Langley Grammar School website

Located in Slough, Berkshire, Langley Grammar School is a co-educational grammar that gained academy status in 2011. Langley Grammar was first established in 1956 and now teaches over 1,000 pupils aged 11-18.

 

Langley Grammar considers itself to be an innovative school that not only provides its pupils with a good academic grounding, but also one that gives focus to the skills needed for navigating the modern world. The school gives pupils the opportunity to partake in a variety of extracurricular activities such as sport, music and drama.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Langley Grammar School

 

 

Address: Langley Grammar School, Reddington Drive, Langley SL3 7QS

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: school@lgs.slough.sch.uk, 01753 598300

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,045 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 180

Open Day Date: May and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Langley Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

There are currently 180 Year 7 places available at Langley Grammar School, with all places determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. As per other grammar schools within the Slough area, Langley hosts a parents-only information evening in May. This event is not suitable for children and no tours of the school will be given. Rather, the event aims to give parents a detailed explanation of the school’s admission process. Children are permitted to attend the school’s open evening in September.

 

Year 7 admissions to Langley Grammar School are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date.

 

For a full breakdown of Langley’s oversubscription criteria or more information about the school’s admissions process, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Langley Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Langley Grammar School, parents must register their child with the Slough Consortium. Next, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF), which can be done online via Slough County Council.

 

As Langley Grammar School follows Slough Consortium’s schedule for Year 7 place allocation, parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure your child is registered in time for the 11 Plus exam.

 

 

Langley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Langley Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 60-65 minutes. All four schools within the Slough Consortium use the same test papers, which test children’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning skills.

 

Parents will receive online results of their child’s 11+ exam in October, before the deadline for submission of the CAF and final place allocations will be published in March.

 

How to Prepare for the Langley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Sitting a formal exam will likely cause a child to feel nervous, but if a solid study plan is put in place early on, it’s possible to keep levels of anxiety to a minimum.

Ensure that your child is studying regularly – just 20 minutes every day can really make a difference to their understanding of the required subjects.

 

Introduce practice exam papers into your child’s study routine early on and when appropriate for your child, take these practice papers under timed conditions. Creating a ‘mock exam’ environment will be excellent practice for the actual exam.

 

To help your child to prepare for the Langley Grammar School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ Multiple-Choice Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ CEM Spelling

 

If your child’s 11+ is looming and the study plan hasn’t gone as well as you’d hoped, don’t worry; read our guide to last minute preparation for the 11 Plus exam.

 

The information provided about Langley Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Lancaster Royal Grammar School website

Founded in 1235, Lancaster Royal Grammar School (LRGS) is a boys-only grammar located in the Lancashire city of Lancaster. Teaching over 1,000 boys aged 11-18, in 2011, LRGS became an academy. One of the UK’s state boarding schools, LRGS is known for its academic and sporting successes.

 

For an overview of the school’s sporting activities, take a look at this short collection of clips from LRGS’s sports day:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Lancaster Royal Grammar School

 

 

Address: Lancaster Royal Grammar School, East Road, Lancaster LA1 3EF

County: Lancashire

Admissions Info: esimmill@lrgs.org.uk, 01524 580629

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,046 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (plus 24 boarding)

Open Day Date: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Lancaster Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Lancaster Royal Grammar School has 150 day places available in Year 7. Admission to the school at this stage is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school hosts an open day in June and an information evening for parents in September. At the information evening, parents can learn more about the school’s values, meet the staff and find out more about the Year 7 admission process.

 

The school welcomes boys from within the Lancaster catchment area, and from further afield – especially if they are considering a boarding place. However, the school prioritises students that are, or have been in Looked After care within the City of Lancaster.

 

For more information about Lancaster Royal Grammar School’s 11+ admissions criteria visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Lancaster Royal Grammar School

 

 

Lancaster Royal Grammar School is very clear about its 11 Plus application process. Parents must complete two application forms:

 

  1. The LRGS application form, which can be completed online
  2. The Local Authority (LA) application form – depending on where you live, this can be found via an online search for your LA

 

LRGS only accepts late applications with good reason.

 

Parents will receive notification of their child’s 11+ results in October and Lancashire LA will publish allocation places in March of the following year.

 

 

Lancaster Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam for Lancaster Royal Grammar School consists of three multiple-choice papers and are based on the KS2 syllabus:

 

  • English – this 45-minute paper consists of 56 questions, including two passages with various questions to test pupils’ spelling, punctuation and grammar
  • Mathematics – a 50-minute paper consisting of 50 questions
  • Verbal Reasoning – a 50-minute test with 80 questions

 

 

How to Prepare for the Lancaster Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

For your son to gain a Year 7 place at Lancaster Royal Grammar School, he must be willing to invest time in revision and preparation. Our 11 Plus guide for parents is an excellent starting point, as it will give you an overview of what the exam could contain.

 

Year 7 places at LRGS are competitive, so give your son a head start with early exam practice. The earlier you start revision, the more opportunities you will have to work on your son’s weaker subjects.

 

Practice test papers are an ideal way of preparing your child for the 11 Plus exam at LRGS. The papers are proven to be an effective way of familiarising students with the layout of the exam and will also help them to improve their time management skills.

 

For the Lancaster Royal Grammar School 11 Plus exam, we specifically recommend the following resources that use the same style and question types as the actual 11+ exam:

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 3(GL-style)

11+ English: Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving (GL-style)

 

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about Lancaster Royal Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Lancaster Girls' Grammar School website

Founded in 1907, Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School (LGGS) is a selective grammar that teaches approximately 900 girls aged 11-18. Now an academy, LGGS has been both a Technology College and a Language College.

 

LGGS consistently performs well in school league tables and has an excellent reputation for promoting high academic achievement, whilst maintaining a relaxed atmosphere. The school’s four houses are named after towns twinned with Lancaster: Aalbord, Lublin, Perpignan and Rendsburg.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School

 

 

Address: Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School, Regent Street, Lancaster LA1 1SF

County: Lancashire

Admissions Info: lggs@lggs.lancs.sch.uk, 01524 581661

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 904 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 140

Open Evening Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Lancashire GL Assessment 11 Plus

 

Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School is solely determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 140 places allocated to Year 7 students, although this figure can vary slightly year-to-year. In June, LGGS hosts an open evening for parents and prospective pupils, where you can meet the Headteacher and learn more about the school’s admission process.

 

The school deals with its Year 7 admissions directly. In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children who permanently live within the city of Lancaster at the time of application and are looked after children, or previously looked after children.
  2. Children who permanently live within the city of Lancaster at the time of application and who are eligible for the Pupil Premium.
  3. Children who permanently live within the city of Lancaster.
  4. All other applicants who live outside of the city of Lancaster who achieve the required standard.

 

Read the school’s admissions booklet for more information about its admissions process.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School

 

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11+ should do so before the exam date. The registration form can be downloaded via the school’s website.

 

Parents must complete their Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) to ensure their daughter is considered for a Year 7 place. Children will sit the exam in September and parents will receive results in October.

 

Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus exam is set by GL Assessment. Girls must sit three multiple-choice tests that cover:

 

  • Mathematics – this test runs for 50-minutes and consists of 50 questions
  • Verbal Reasoning – this test is 50-minutes long and consists of 80 questions
  • English – this test is 45-minutes long and consists of 56 questions

 

All questions contained within these exams are based on the Key Stage 2 curriculum.

 

How to Prepare for the Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School consistently features in the top 20 secondary schools in the UK, it’s little surprise that it is a very popular choice with parents. To maximise your daughter’s chances of success in the LGGS 11 Plus exam, you need to be organised. For an overview of the exam, have a read of our 11 Plus guide for parents, which will give you a better understanding of what your daughter can expect from the tests.

 

If your daughter’s progress has plateaued, or you’ve noticed knowledge gaps in her learning, try practice test papers. They’re a great way of preparing your child for the 11 Plus exam at LGGS because they help familiarise students with the layout of the tests and can help improve time management.

 

For the Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend:

 

 

The information provided about Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Shakespeare’s School exam

Located in Warwickshire’s market town of Stratford-upon-Avon, King Edward VI School (K.E.S) is a boys’ grammar, with girls attending its sixth form since 2013. Known as ‘Shakespeare’s School’, it’s believed that William Shakespeare attended the facility, although there there’s little supporting evidence. K.E.S became an academy in 2011 and currently teaches over 500 pupils.

 

Pupils participate in a variety of extracurricular activities, with notable emphasis placed on sports, including rugby, fencing and rowing.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI School

 

 

Address: King Edward VI School, Church Street, Stratford-upon-Avon CV37 6HB

County: Warwickshire

Admissions Info: office@kes.net, 01789 293351

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 558 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 87

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Warwickshire CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

King Edward VI School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

With just 87 places available, parents are firmly encouraged to ensure that K.E.S is the right educational environment for their son before applying. By attending the school’s open day in June, both parents and prospective pupils will have the opportunity to see the school grounds and meet members of staff.

 

Should there be more applications than available places in Year 7, the school applies its oversubscription criteria, outlined here, in order of priority.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI School

 

 

Warwickshire Admissions is responsible for Year 7 entry to King Edward VI School. To apply, parents must register their son for the school’s entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form (CAF). The school’s admissions policy states that late 11+ registrations will not be considered in the first round of offers. In addition to registering for the exam, Warwickshire Admissions require evidence of the child’s home address.

 

Parents will be notified of results via post from mid-October and the first round of place allocations will be available from the beginning of March.

 

 

King Edward VI School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The King Edward VI School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last for approximately 50 minutes each. They contain a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering the following subjects:

The Verbal Reasoning exam includes an English component, which consists of a comprehension and cloze test. The maths exam involves a numeracy test, which tests for ability in mental arithmetic and problem-solving questions. Each answer sheet is marked electronically for accuracy.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

King Edward VI School is consistently oversubscribed in Year 7, so your son should follow a good 11 Plus study plan in order to increase his chances of gaining one of the school’s 87 places.

 

Practice exam papers are a great way to get your son used to the format of the K.E.S 11 Plus and improve his time management skills ahead of the tests. Prior practice of the skills tested in the entrance exam will be of a huge advantage to your son.

 

Our practice papers come complete with answers, enabling you to accurately measure your child’s performance and track their progress in the lead-up to the exam. We have several 11 Plus practice papers that can help your child prepare for entry to King Edward VI School.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources for the Warwickshire 11 plus:

 

The information provided about King Edward VI School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Handsworth School website

Founded in 1883, King Edward VI Handsworth School is a girls-only selective grammar located in Birmingham. Part of the Foundation of the Schools of King Edward VI, over 900 girls currently attend the school and it is considered one of the top state schools in the UK.

 

King Edward VI Handsworth offers pupils a broad curriculum and although it has a rich history, it nevertheless considers itself to be a forward-thinking and modern teaching facility.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Handsworth School

 

 

Address: King Edward VI Handsworth School, Rose Hill Road, B21 9AR

County: Birmingham, West Midlands

Admissions Info: office@kingedwardvi.bham.sch.uk, 0121 554 2342

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 912 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Date: June / September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

King Edward VI Handsworth School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

King Edward VI Hansdworth School for Girls follows the admission criteria of the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium, along with seven other grammar schools in the area. Only pupils who reach the required standard via the 11+ entrance exam will be considered for entry.

 

The Consortium requires that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the CEM 11 Plus exam. Pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ to be eligible for admission. However, attaining the qualifying score does not guarantee your daughter a place as the school only has 160 Year 7 places.

 

If test results are equal, priority will be given to:

 

  1. Looked after children and previously looked after children who achieve the qualifying score
  2. Children registered for Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score (limited to 32 places)
  3. Children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Handsworth School

 

 

In order to apply for a place at the school, parents must register their daughter with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium using the online application form. Parents must also complete a Local Authority Preference form for their daughter to be considered for a grammar school place in Birmingham.

 

11 Plus test results will be released in October, with official places allocated in the following March.

 

 

King Edward VI Handsworth School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

All eight grammar schools across Birmingham sit the same 11 Plus exam, including prospective pupils at King Edward VI Handsworth School. The exam consists of two papers, which both last approximately 50 minutes, with additional time for instructions. The two papers are split into sections that cover the following topics:

 

 

The majority of the questions in these papers are multiple-choice and children will be provided with a separate answer sheet.

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Handsworth School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

If King Edward VI Handsworth School is your daughter’s first choice school at Year 7, you must ensure that she has all the necessary resources to perform well in the 11 Plus exam. Competition for its 160 places at this stage is fierce so it’s important to set a revision timetable with your daughter that covers all the required subjects. A timetable can also help ensure that your daughter covers everything she’ll need to know for the exam, without being overworked.

 

To be in with a good chance of gaining a Year 7 place at King Edward VI Handsworth School, we’d suggest using practice exam papers; they are a proven method of helping revision at 11 Plus level.

 

We would specifically recommend the following practice resources for the King Edward VI Handsworth School 11+ exam:

 

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Handsworth School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth website

King Edward VI Grammar School (KEVIGS), Louth is a co-educational facility established in 1276. Originally a boys’ school, girls have attended since 1965 when the local girls’ school joined with KEVIGS.

 

Located in the Lincolnshire market town of Louth, KEVIGS teaches approximately 800 pupils aged 11-18, and became an academy in 2015.

 

For an insight into the school’s extracurricular activities, watch this short promotional video showcasing its sports day:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth

 

 

Address: King Edward VI Grammar School, Edward Street, Louth LN11 9LL

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: rhona.adam@kevigs.lincs.sch.uk, 01507 600456

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 795

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to KEVIGS in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 120 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school strongly encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open evenings. Parents can also arrange individual tours.

 

KEVIGS is a member of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools and the Local Authority co-ordinates the school’s admissions at Year 7.

 

With 120 places available, should KEVIGS be oversubscribed, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children, or previously looked after children
  2. The siblings of children who will still be attending King Edward VI when the child is due to start
  3. Eligible children in Year 6 who live within the traditional catchment area
  4. Candidates with the highest test scores

 

If you have more questions about KEVIGS’s admission process at Year 7, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth

 

 

Parents must download and complete a registration form from the school’s website in the first instance. Once a child has sat the 11+ in September, results will be sent to parents by the LA in October. Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) directly via the LA website. Failure to do so will mean your child will not be considered for a grammar school place in Lincolnshire. Parents are advised by the school to place King Edward’s as their number one preference on the CAF to maximise their child’s chances of gaining a place in Year 7.

 

King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth  11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Prospective pupils to King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth must sit two 11+ tests on two separate dates. These exams are multiple-choice and students will be tested on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions. Questions are divided into 15 or more sections, with 5/6 questions in each section.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. Questions must be answered one section at a time, with seven minutes allocated for each section. Pupils cannot move onto the next section until they are told to do so.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

While it’s understandable that some children worry about sitting their 11+, the reality is that with a good revision timetable and plenty of practice, there shouldn’t be anything to be concerned about. King Edward VI Grammar School in Louth is consistently oversubscribed for Year 7 places, so it’s important to allow your child plenty of time to revise for the 11 Plus exam. Regular revision will highlight any knowledge gaps early on and will also improve your child’s confidence.

 

The King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth 11 Plus focuses on your child’s reasoning skills, so take a look at these articles to help prepare them:

 

 

Have you considered practice exam papers? These should be introduced into your child’s revision timetable early on. Your child will need excellent time management skills to complete the 11+ GL Assessment and practice papers can help with this.

 

The 11+ practice papers below cover all the required question types that your child will face in the King Edward VI Grammar School exam. Designed to challenge your child, once the test is complete, you will receive scored feedback immediately. If your child is set to sit the KEVIGS in Year 6, we would fully recommend the following practice papers:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Photo of a pen and notepad on a desk

KS2 SATs Maths tests your child’s understanding of numbers and mathematical problem-solving. But for some children, this knowledge doesn’t come easily and this can lead to anxiety that can impact their final SATs score. In this article, we share everything you need to know about the KS2 SATs Maths test, including what to focus your child’s revision sessions on and how to prepare for the exam itself.

 

KS2 Maths: Understanding the Test

 

 

Towards the end of Year 6, all children in the UK sit a Key Stage 2 Maths SATs exam. There are three test papers in total, consisting of:

  • Paper 1 – arithmetic (30 minutes)

This arithmetic paper is made up of around 36 number-focused questions, that challenge pupils to use addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. In this paper, children will be required to use percentages, fractions and decimals.

  • Paper 2 – reasoning (40 minutes)
  • Paper 3 – reasoning (40 minutes)

Both of these reasoning papers consist of around 20 problem-solving questions, in which children must show solid mathematical knowledge by solving various problems and puzzles.

 

 

KS2 SATs Maths: Areas to Focus On

Photo of a numeracy text paper

 

For your child to perform well in the Maths SATs at KS2, they are required to understand a variety of mathematical topics. Although not an exhaustive list, below are some of the topics your child could be tested on during the exam:

 

  • Addition and Subtraction
  • Algebra
  • Fractions, Decimals and Percentages
  • Fractions – equivalent, adding, subtracting, improper and mixed
  • Geometry – properties of shapes and position and movement
  • Measurement – metric units, area, perimeter
  • Measurement – time and roman numerals
  • Multiplication and Division
  • Number and Place Value
  • Ratio and Proportion
  • Statistics

 

With such a broad scope, it’s important that your child understands basic mathematical concepts such as addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, before introducing more difficult topics such as algebra and ratio.

 

If your child is continually struggling with a particular question type, work out why that is: what skill are they lacking? Perhaps they don’t know their times tables, or are unable to convert units of measurement. Practice SATs papers can give you a greater knowledge of your child’s weaker topics, well ahead of the SATs exam date.

 

 

KS2 SAT Maths: How to Prepare Your Child

Numeracy test puzzles

 

If you are preparing your child for their KS2 SATs, take a look at our preparation tips. When it comes to KS2 Maths revision, you can simply focus your child’s revision sessions to include the skills they will need for the exam. Why not try a combination of the revision strategies below?

 

Use Revision Cards

 

 

Plenty of mathematical topics lend themselves well to visuals, which can help learners who prefer this learning technique. Revision cards can help more interactive children to visualise their knowledge more easily.

 

Write a Maths Revision Timetable

 

 

Whether this is part of an overall study plan, or is a separate revision timetable, make sure your child is committing enough time to their maths study. Again, this can be more of a visual timetable with a wall planner, or can be a very simple spreadsheet that is easy for your child to follow from session-to-session.

 

Use Games to Make it Fun

 

 

A great way to maintain your child’s motivation for SATs study is through revision games. Revising number facts and mental arithmetic through quizzes or roleplay will help to keep them engaged for longer.

 

 

Use Practice Papers

 

 

It’s best to approach KS2 SATs revision ‘little and often’; perhaps introduce one practice SATs paper per week at first and then build up to more as the exam date gets closer. These papers will boost your child’s confidence ahead of the Maths SAT, as they will have acquired a greater knowledge of how the exam paper will be laid out and what format it will take. If your child is approaching Year 6 and will soon be sitting the KS2 SATs Maths exam, we would recommend the following practice papers:

 

Key Stage 2 SATs Practice Test 1

Key Stage 2 SATs Practice Test 2

 

Relax

 

SATs are important, but make sure that your child isn’t overworking or at risk of burning out. Encourage them to get outside and be active, to eat well and to get plenty of good quality sleep. They’ll need it if they are going to succeed in their KS2 SATs!

 

Related Posts:

KS2 SATs Preparation Tips

SATs Advice for Parents

 

Image sources:

Timy Penburg

Chaparral

Home School Mom

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Five Ways School

King Edward VI Five Ways (KEFW) is a Birmingham-based selective grammar school for boys and girls aged 11-18. Founded in 1883, it moved to its current location in Bartley Green in 1958.

Over 1,100 students are divided into four houses from Year 7. Each student aims to gain as many house points as possible throughout the school year, with a hope of winning the House Championship.

 

If you’d like to learn more about life at King Edward VI Five Ways School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Five Ways School

 

 

Address: King Edward VI Five Ways School, Scotland Lane, Bartley Green, Birmingham B32 4BT

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: office@kefw.org, 0121 475 3535

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,172 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus

 

King Edward VI Five Ways School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Since 2011, all grammar schools in Birmingham follow the admissions criteria of The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. At King Edward VI Five Ways School, all prospective Year 7 students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. Due to substantial competition, not every child who achieves the qualifying score can be offered a place at KEFW.

 

Across grammar schools in the West Midlands, applicants are ranked according to their test score. If test scores are equal, priority is given to students who meet the following criteria:

 

  1. Looked After Children or Previously Looked After Children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score (limited to 36 places)
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score

 

More information about the admission policy at King Edward VI Five Ways can be found on the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Five Ways School

 

 

If you would like your child to be considered for one of KEFW’s 180 Year 7 places, you must register online with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Parents also need to complete a Local Authority Preference form.

 

Exam results will be published in October, following the 11+ exam in September, although places will not be allocated until March the following year.

 

King Edward VI Five Ways School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

All eight grammar schools in Birmingham hold the same 11 Plus exam on the same day in September. The exam consists of two 50-minute tests that cover the following subjects:

 

Most of the questions across the two papers are multiple-choice and children will be required to answer on a separate sheet. All marks are standardised, to account for age differences, and are then added together.

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Five Ways School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Some children find the thought of sitting the 11 Plus exam an intimidating prospect, but with parental support and good revision techniques, the test itself needn’t cause undue worry in your household.

 

The King Edward Schools in Birmingham are hugely oversubscribed and KEFW is no different. For your child to have the best chance of gaining one of its 180 Year 7 places, they must do plenty of 11 Plus revision. The CEM 11+ exam requires excellent time management skills if pupils are going to complete all questions, so make sure your child takes practice test papers under timed conditions.

 

For the King Edward VI Five Ways School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Five Ways School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls website

King Edward VI (KEVI) Camp Hill School for Girls was founded in 1883 and currently teaches girls aged 11 to 18. Located in the Birmingham suburb of Kings Heath, the school shares its campus with King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys.

 

Over 800 girls are provided with a high-quality education at Camp Hill School for Girls and its students regularly produce outstanding exam results, compared with other schools in the UK.

 

The school specialises in Computing, Languages and Mathematics and offers pupils first-class facilities, including specialist classrooms, a large sports hall and extensive grounds for extracurricular activities.

 

For an insight into life as a student at King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls

 

 

Address: King Edward VI School Camp Hill for Girls, Vicarage Road, Kings Heath, Birmingham B14 7QJ

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: head@kechg.org.uk, 0121 444 2150

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 863

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: July and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All of Birmingham’s eight grammar schools follow the admissions criteria of the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Only pupils who reach the required standard via the 11+ entrance exam will be considered for entry to Camp Hill School for Girls.

 

All prospective grammar school students in Birmingham are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. To be eligible for admission, pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam. Parents should note however, that attainment of the qualifying score doesn’t necessarily guarantee students a place at Camp Hill School for Girls.

 

If you would like to learn more about King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls’ admission policy, please visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls, parents must register their daughter directly with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Parents also need to complete a Local Authority (LA) Preference form; parents can choose up to six schools on this form.

 

Parents should receive 11 Plus test results in October, although places will not be allocated until March the following year.

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls 11+ exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes, with additional time for instructions. The papers are split into individually-timed sections, as follows:

 

 

Most of the questions are multiple-choice and are fully age-standardised, to ensure fairness.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

For children unfamiliar with the examination process, the thought of the 11 Plus can be a daunting one and it can be an anxious time for parents too. However, with a good revision plan and use of the right practice resources, there is every chance that your daughter will perform well in the marked assessments.

 

Whatever your daughter’s academic ability, you should set a solid revision plan well ahead of the exam date. All children benefit from regular exam practice sessions, whatever their natural attainment. For the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls’ 11 Plus test, it would be a good idea to include practice exam papers in your daughter’s study plan.

 

Practice papers allow pupils to get a better idea of the types of questions they can expect in the exam and they also provide parents with a good indication of their child’s current abilities. If you spot any weaker skills or subjects, you can simply invest more time in these areas in the build-up to exam day.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we have several 11+ practice papers suitable for those sitting the CEM 11 Plus exam for King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls:

 

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys website

Founded in 1883, King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys is a selective boys’ grammar school in Birmingham. Camp Hill Boys specialises in Applied Learning, Mathematics and Science and is consistently rated as one of the most academically-successful schools in the UK.

 

In 1956, Camp Hill Boys moved to its current site in Kings Heath and now shares a campus with King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls, its sister school. Despite its academic success, Camp Hill Boys doesn’t rest on its reputation; it provides pupils with a well-rounded education and is always looking to build on and improve its sports teams and school facilities

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys

 

 

Address: King Edward VI School Camp Hill for Boys, Vicarage Road, Kings Heath, Birmingham B14 7QJ

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: enquiry@camphillboys.bham.sch.uk, 0121 444 3188

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 803

Number of Places in Year 7: 95

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys is part of The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium, which sets the admissions criteria in the West Midlands. Admission to Camp Hill for Boys is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam and as a highly selective school; only pupils who reach the required standard via this assessment will be considered for a Year 7 place.

 

As per all grammar schools in Birmingham, prospective Year 7 students at Camp Hill Boys are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. Pupils must achieve the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam to be considered for a place. Parents should be aware though, that due to oversubscription, not every boy who achieves the qualifying score can be offered a place.

 

In the likely event of oversubscription, Camp Hill Boys will apply the following criteria to assign places, in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked After Children or Previously Looked After Children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score
  2. Children attracting the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score (limited to 24 places)
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score

 

Find out more about King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys’ admission policy.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys, parents must first register their son with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Next, parents should complete a Local Authority (LA) Preference form, where they can name up to six preferred schools. It is the responsibility of the LA to consider each application.

 

The local LA will send out 11 Plus test results in early March.

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys’ 11+ exam consists of two test papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes. The papers are split into individually-timed sections that cover the following subjects:

 

 

Most of the questions across the two papers are multiple-choice and children are required to answer on a separate sheet. The tests are fully age-standardised, to take into account age differences.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

In recent years, Camp Hill School for Boys has revealed that they receive 1,000 applications for their 120 Year 7 places. With an excellent reputation for academic achievement, that’s no surprise. This means that your son will have to be fully-prepared for his 11 Plus exam in order to gain a place.

 

Whether your son has natural academic talent, or struggles in particular subjects, it’s essential to set a 11 Plus revision plan well ahead of the actual exam. To prepare your son for the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys’ 11+ exam, consider using practice test papers.

 

The CEM (Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) 11 Plus exam from University of Durham requires pupils to answer its questions quickly and confidently, without much hesitation. In order to complete the papers within the allocated time, children usually need to improve their time management skills and this is something practice exam papers can help with.

 

If your son is sitting the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys’ 11 Plus exam, arm him with the necessary resources. We would highly recommend the following practice papers:

 

 

If your son responds well to this practice, or has a weaker subject that requires more work, take a look at our complete selection of 11 Plus practice exam papers.

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Aston School website

Founded in 1883, Birmingham-based King Edward VI Aston School is a boys’ grammar and specialist sports college. One of the seven schools that make up the Foundation of the Schools of King Edward VI, Aston teaches over 750 boys aged 11-18.

 

As expected of a sports college, King Edward VI Aston School places particular emphasis on a range of sporting activities and also focuses attention on more creative outlets, such as music and drama.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Aston School

 

 

Address: King Edward VI Aston School, Frederick Road, Aston, Birmingham B6 6DJ

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: enquiry@keaston.bham.sch.uk,  0121 327 1130

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 757 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: Various: July – October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All grammar schools in Birmingham follow the admissions criteria of The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Only pupils who reach the required standard via an 11 Plus entrance exam will be considered for entry to King Edward VI Aston School.

 

In line with the Consortium’s guidelines, prospective Year 7 students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. Pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam to be considered for a place. However, due to the popularity of King Edward VI Aston School, not every child who achieves the qualifying score can be offered a place.

 

Applicants are ranked according to their test score and, if test scores are equal, places will be prioritised as follows:

 

  1. Looked After Children or Previously Looked After Children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score.
  2. Children attracting the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score (limited to 30 places).
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score.

 

More information about the admission policy of King Edward VI Aston School can be found on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Aston School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at King Edward VI Aston School, parents must register their child directly with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium; this can be done online. Parents are also obligated to complete a Local Authority Preference form.

 

Parents and carers will receive their son’s 11 Plus test results in October, with Year 7 places allocated early, the following March.

 

 

King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The King Edward VI Aston School exam consists of two test papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes. The papers are split into individually timed sections that cover:

 

 

Most of the questions across the two papers are multiple-choice and children will be required to answer on a separate sheet.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

To maximise your child’s chances of success in the King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus exam, you need to be organised and motivate your son to stick to a study plan. Investing time early in his preparation will help to keep stress levels lower as the exam date approaches. Take a look at our 11 Plus guide for parents, which will give you an overview of the exam and what to expect of the 11+ process from start to finish.

 

Birmingham is a very competitive grammar school area and King Edward VI Aston School is usually oversubscribed. So, 11 Plus revision is a must if your son is going to gain a place at the school. Practice test papers are a great way of preparing your child for the 11 Plus exam.

 

Your son will need to have excellent time management for the CEM 11+ Plus exam, as it is relatively fast-paced. Our practice papers are an effective tool for improving students’ time management skills.

 

For the King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Aston School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Kesteven & Sleaford High School Selective Academy website

Founded in 1902, Kesteven and Sleaford High School (KSHS) is a selective school for girls aged 11-18. The school has academy status and boys can attend in sixth form from age 16.

 

Located in the market town of Seaford in Lincolnshire, KSHS currently teaches over 800 pupils. A member of the Robert Carre Trust, Ofsted praised KSHS’s ‘calm and purposeful atmosphere’ in its 2013 report.

 

For an insight into academic life at Kesteven & Sleaford High School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Kesteven & Sleaford High School

 

 

Address: Kesteven and Sleaford High School, Jermyn Street, Sleaford NG34 7RS

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@kshs.uk, 01529 414044

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 833 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 128

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Kesteven & Sleaford High School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. KSHS fully complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated admission arrangements for Year 7, while the school carries out the 11+ tests.

 

With 128 places available in Year 7, in cases of oversubscription, the school uses the following criteria to determine pupil priority:

 

  1. The child is, or has been in the care of the Local Authority
  2. The child is registered for Pupil Premium
  3. Students who, at the time of admission, have siblings at one of the schools within the Robert Carre Trust
  4. Straight line distance from the home to KSHS, priority will be given to the child living closest to the school

 

If you have more questions about KSHS’s admissions process at Year 7, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Kesteven & Sleaford High School

 

 

Kesteven & Sleaford High School complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s admission arrangements. Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) via the LA website to register their daughter for a 11 Plus exam place. Those living outside of Lincolnshire must return their CAF form to their own LA, who will forward the application to Lincolnshire LA.

 

Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Prospective pupils to Kesteven & Sleaford High School must sit two 11+ exams over two days. These exams are multiple-choice and students will be tested on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test consists of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning – this 40-minute test consists of 70 questions and is split into five sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Parents shouldn’t be worried about starting 11 Plus preparation ‘too early’; there’s no such thing. Giving your child plenty of time to study for the exams will not only improve their confidence, but will also allow you to recognise any knowledge gaps that they might have. Children typically respond better to shorter bursts of study practice, compared with sizeable chunks, so help them to prepare for the 11 Plus exam by creating a study plan that’s achievable.

 

Our 11 Plus guide for Parents will help to answer any burning questions you might have about the exam. As the Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus focuses on reasoning skills, your daughter should benefit from these articles:

 

 

Practice exam papers should also be introduced into your child’s revision timetable early on. These papers can help identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, allowing you to commit additional time to areas that need improvement. They can also help improve your daughter’s time management skills.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus exam. We would specifically recommend the following useful resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about Kesteven & Sleaford High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Kesteven & Grantham Girls' School website

Founded in 1910, Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School (KGGS) is a girls-only grammar school located in the Lincolnshire market town of Grantham. A selective academy, KGGS currently teaches over 1,100 girls aged 11-18.

 

Students are split across six houses that compete with each other across the school year in events such as sports, public speaking and dance shows.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School

 

 

Address: Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School, Sandon Road, Grantham NG31 9AU

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: mailto@kggs.org, 01476 563017

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,157 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 175

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School is part of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools, although it coordinates its 11+ testing directly. With 175 places available at Year 7, in the event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. The child is in the care of the local authority or has previously been in care.
  2. The child has a sibling at the school at the time of application.
  3. Children living nearest to the school.

 

For more information about KGGS’s admissions process, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School, parents should initially visit the Local Authority (LA) website to register their interest in a place. Next, download and complete the school’s registration form to book your child’s place in the 11 Plus exam.

 

Parents will receive exam results via post in October, ahead of the deadline for returning the parental preference form to the local authority. In March of the following year, the local authority will send out place offers based on the preferences submitted on the application form.

 

 

Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus test for Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School consists of two multiple-choice papers. The Non-Verbal Reasoning test is sat one week after the Verbal Reasoning test.

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. Once a section has been completed, students cannot move onto the next one until they are told to do so.

 

How to Prepare for the Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School is a popular Lincolnshire grammar, so parents must prepare their daughter for the 11 Plus exam well ahead of the exam dates. KGGS’s 11 Plus tests focus on reasoning, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

If your daughter is worried about sitting the 11+, practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing her confidence, as they help students become familiar with the layout of the questions. Practice papers can also highlight any time management problems, so consider setting timed papers to help improve these much-needed skills.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School exam. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Kendrick School website

Kendrick School is a selective girls’ grammar school located in Berkshire, Reading. Open to over 700 girls aged 11-18, Kendrick became an academy in 2011. A specialist school in Languages, Mathematics and Science, the school has been awarded ‘Outstanding’ in its last four Ofsted inspections.

Offering a broad curriculum, Kendrick School combines traditional and modern learning approaches to ensure its girls are fully prepared for any challenges they might face when they leave the school.

 

For an insight into life at Kendrick School watch this student-shot video, showcasing a ‘day in the life’ of a Kendrick girl:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Kendrick School

 

 

Address: Kendrick Grammar School, London Road, Reading RG1 5BN

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: admin@kendrick.reading.sch.uk, 0118 9015859

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 709 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 95-100

Open Day Date: April

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Kendrick School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Kendrick School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. If you are considering Kendrick as an option for your daughter, you are advised to attend an open event, where you can find out more about the admissions process. Kendrick School is one of a number of grammar schools in the Berkshire area that uses the same 11 plus entrance exam set by CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) by University of Durham.

 

Kendrick School is usually oversubscribed for Year 7 places, in which case, the school applies the following oversubscription criteria, in order of priority:

 

  1. Children who are, or have previously been, looked after.
  2. The permanent home address of the student is within the designated area of the school and the applicant is a Pupil Premium or Service Premium child.
  3. The permanent home address of the student is within the designated area of the school and this home address is the address of the parent(s)/carer(s) and the applicant.
  4. Students whose home address is not in the designated area of the school.

 

For more details about Kendrick School’s admission criteria, please visit the website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Kendrick School

 

 

To register interest for a Year 7 place at Kendrick School, parents must first complete their Local Authority’s (LA) Common Application Form (CAF). To register for the 11+ admissions test itself, parents need to complete a separate application directly with the school. The registration form can be completed online when applications are open. Parents should note that late applications will not be accepted, although the school will consider exceptional circumstances if supportive evidence is provided.

 

 

Kendrick School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Kendrick School 11 Plus exam consists of two individual papers, each lasting 50 minutes. The papers are made up of mixed questions and are mainly multiple-choice, covering:

 

 

Parents will receive results of their child’s 11+ exam in October, before the deadline for the submission of the CAF.

 

How to Prepare for the Kendrick School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

If Kendrick School is your child’s first choice, they might feel undue pressure to perform well in the 11+ exam. However, by learning how to study for the 11 Plus exam, your daughter should be able to approach the exam with confidence.

 

At Year 6, most children can only maintain their concentration for half an hour at a time, so approach 11+ revision sessions realistically. After a day at school, revision is likely to be the last thing on your daughter’s mind, so split study sessions into short, manageable blocks.

 

Kendrick School’s 11 Plus exam places a large emphasis on reasoning; if your daughter struggles with this skill (and many children do), read the following articles on how to improve her performance:

 

 

If your daughter encounters problems with time management, introduce practice exam papers into her study routine. Not only will they give her a better idea of how quickly questions should be answered in the allotted time, you will also be able to monitor your child’s progress closely, as immediate feedback is provided for each paper.

 

Our 11 Plus practice papers can help your child to prepare for the Kendrick School exam. To begin with, we would recommend:

 

 

The information provided about Kendrick School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Herschel Grammar School 11 Plus Exam

Herschel Grammar School is a selective, co-educational grammar located in the large Berkshire town of Slough. An academy school, it provides a broad and balanced curriculum to approximately 900 students.

 

Pupils at Herschel Grammar School have consistently produced good examination results in recent years and, according to Ofsted, the school shows ‘significant improvement’ between Year 7 and Year 11.

 

For an insight into academic life at Herschel Grammar School watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Herschel Grammar School

 

 

Address: Herschel Grammar School, Northampton Avenue, Slough SL1 3BW

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: mail@herschel.slough.sch.uk, 01753 520950

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 879 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Herschel Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

There are currently 150 Year 7 places available at Herschel Grammar School and

admission is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Unlike many other UK grammar schools, Herschel hosts an information evening for parents only. The event, which takes place in May, enables parents to find out more information on the school’s admission process.

 

Admissions to Herschel Grammar School are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date. In cases of oversubscription, the school will adhere to the following criteria, in order of priority:

 

  • Students who are, or have previously been, in looked-after care.
  • Students who have an Education Health and Care Plan and have reached the required standard.
  • Students who have a permanent home address within 10 miles of the school and who are eligible for the Pupil Premium (up to 30 places).

 

Remaining pupils will be ranked in order of their performance in the entrance exams.

 

For more details on Herschel Grammar School’s admission criteria, please visit the website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Herschel Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Herschel Grammar School, parents must register their child with the Slough Consortium in the first instance. Next, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF); this can be done online via Slough County Council.

 

As Herschel Grammar School follows Slough Consortium’s schedule for Year 7 place allocation, parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure your child is registered in time for the 11 Plus exam.

 

 

Herschel Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Herschel Grammar School 11+ exam consists of two individual papers, each lasting approximately 60-65 minutes. The papers across all schools in the Slough Consortium are the same and cover a mixture of questions that test Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning.

 

Parents will receive their child’s exam results online in October, before the deadline for submission of the CAF. All results are fully age standardised.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Herschel Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

While it’s understandable that some children are nervous about the idea of sitting the 11 Plus exam, with the right study plan, it needn’t cause any undue anxiety. Similarly, as a parent you might be worried about your child in the tests, but our parents’ guide to the 11 Plus should allay any fears.

 

Don’t leave your child’s 11 Plus preparation until the last minute; set aside time daily for your child to revise. It’s a good idea to introduce practice exam papers into your child’s study routine early on, as these will give them a clearer idea of the structure of the exam. Ensure that your child takes our practice papers under timed conditions, as this will get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

Our 11 Plus practice papers can help your child to prepare for the Herschel Grammar School exam. As a starting point, we would recommend:

 

 

The information provided about Herschel Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

High School for Girls, Gloucester is a selective grammar school for girls aged 11-18. It accepts boys into the Sixth Form and, in total, the school teaches over 800 pupils. High School for Girls is an academy and, due to its excellent exam results, it is consistently ranked as one of the best schools in England.

 

Founded in 1883, High School for Girls divides its pupils into five houses: Barwell, Bearland, Hartland Kyneburga and Mynd. Throughout each year, the houses compete in various sporting activities in an effort to win the school cup.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The High School for Girls

 

 

Address: Gloucester High School for Girls, Denmark Road, Gloucester GL1 3JN

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: office@hsfg.org, 01452 543335

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 849 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: April and June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)

 

The High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

For your child to be in with a chance of gaining one of the 150 Year 7 places at the school, she must reach the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. As per all the other grammar schools in Gloucestershire, High School for Girls’ Year 7 allocations are dealt with via Gloucestershire County Council. Parents who wish their daughter to sit the test must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open.

 

In recent years, there has been three applications for every place, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to girls scoring highest in the 11 plus examination. Should there be a tie for places after this, the admissions’ authority will allocate places at random.

 

To find out more about High School for Girls’ admissions process, or to see key dates for the process, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The High School for Girls

 

 

All seven grammar schools in the county of Gloucestershire adhere to the same testing process from CEM (Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring). In order for your daughter to be considered for a place at High School for Girls, you must complete a Common Application Form online via the Local Authority and a test registration form, available online via the school itself.

 

Late registrations will not be accepted, but if a child is unable to sit a test due to illness, an accident, or sudden bereavement, the school may make arrangements for them to sit a ‘Late Test’, although this is not guaranteed.

 

Parents will receive results in October and if your daughter meets the qualifying standard, you can apply for a place at the High School for Girls.

 

 

The High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Since 2013, High School for Girls has adopted the CEM 11 Plus exam, which consists of two papers covering:

 

 

Both tests last 45-50 minutes, are made up of multiple-choice questions and are taken on the same day.

 

Our guide to 11+ exam boards will give you more information about what to expect from the CEM test.

 

 

How to Prepare for The High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

High School for Girls is one of the top selective schools in the UK and competition for Year 7 entry is strong. With only 150 places available, your daughter should prepare for the 11+ exam well ahead of exam day. We know it can be difficult to motivate your child to study regularly for upcoming exams, so keep it fun. Suggest interesting books to read that will improve their comprehension, or adapt some of these revision games to suit their preferred learning style. Soon enough, your child will consider 11 Plus revision as part of a normal day.

 

Have you considered practice exam papers? They can provide effective revision practice and help familiarise your daughter with the layout of the exam. We would recommend:

 

 

Alternatively, if your child requires additional practice in a particular subject, you can choose from our full selection of 11 Plus practice exam papers, available now.
The information provided about the High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Invicta Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Invicta Grammar School is a girls’ grammar based in the Maidstone area of Kent. The school has academy status and became a specialist Business and Enterprise College in 2003. It currently teaches over 1,100 girls aged 11-18, although some boys are admitted into the sixth from age 16.

 

For an insight into academic life at Year 7 at Invicta Grammar Schoo,l watch this short promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Invicta Grammar School

 

 

Address: Invicta Grammar School, Huntsman Lane, Maidstone ME14 5DR

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@invicta.viat.org.uk, 01622 357012

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,141 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 192

Open Day Date: May – July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test

 

 

Invicta Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Prospective pupils must sit the Kent Test at 11 Plus and achieve the required standard to be considered for a place in Year 7. The school strongly advises that students and parents arrange a visit before registering and attend one of its open events, which includes familiarisation workshops. At the open events, school staff are on hand to answer any questions regarding the admissions process and parents will get the opportunity to tour the school with a current student.

 

Invicta Grammar School has changed its admissions process in recent years, so parents are advised to read its current admissions policy before registering their daughter for a Year 7 place.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Invicta Grammar School

 

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete an online registration form.

 

Once your daughter has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. The Council will send assessment results to parents in October and offers will be sent out on National Offer Day in March the following year.

 

If you have any further queries about Invicta Grammar School’s admissions process at Year 7, call the school on 01622 357012 or email office@invicta.viat.org.uk.

 

 

Invicta Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

In line with the majority of grammar schools in Kent, Invicta uses the Kent 11 Plus exam. The Kent Exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with separate answer sheets, in the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests pupils’ reasoning abilities. Girls will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
  3. A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Invicta Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Kent is the largest and most competitive grammar school area in England, so it’s vital that your daughter makes the most of her revision time and resources in the lead-up to the test.

 

Research into exam revision has shown that children are likely to perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer period, rather than have crammed a day or two beforehand. This revision should be broken down into manageable doses, little and often, rather than for extended periods. With regular revision, you should see an uplift in your daughter’s performance.

 

The Kent Test covers a number of subjects and it’s possible that your daughter is stronger in some areas and weaker in others. If that’s the case, we recommend practice exam papers as a good way to highlight those areas early on. Don’t be afraid to introduce these papers at the beginning of your child’s revision for the 11 Plus, as they will allow you to monitor their progress.

 

Pupils sitting the Kent Test, with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at Invicta Grammar School, will benefit from these resources, which have been specifically designed to replicate the Kent 11 Plus exam’s format, structure, style, timings and question types:

 

 

As previously mentioned, if your daughter does require additional revision in a particular subject or two, these practice exam papers are suitable as they contain multiple-chocie questions similar to the ones she will be asked in the exam:

 

The information provided about Invicta Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Ilford County High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Ilford County High School (ICHS) is a selective grammar school located in Barkingside and remains the only boys’ selective school in the London Borough of Redbridge. Founded in 1901, the school currently teaches a broad curriculum to around 1,000 boys, in a challenging yet supportive learning environment.

 

In 2012, the school joined the Leading Edge Partnership, which encourages schools across the UK to learn from each other. The school offers a mix of extracurricular activities to suit their pupils’ wide variety of interests.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Ilford County High School

 

 

Address: Ilford County High School, Fremantle Road, Barkingside, Ilford

County: London Borough of Redbridge

Admissions Info: enquiries@ichs.org.uk, 020 8551 6496

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 999 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Ilford County High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Year 7 admissions to Ilford County High School are managed by the local authority, the London Borough of Redbridge (LBR). With 180 places available, parents are advised to visit ICHS ahead of registration to ensure it is the right learning environment for their son.

 

ICHS is often oversubscribed for places in Year 7 and in this case, the school uses the following criteria, in order of priority:

 

  • Children who are looked after, or have previously been looked after.
  • Children with exceptional medical or psychological needs.
  • Children with a sibling already at the school.
  • Children who live closest to the school.

 

If you have any questions about ICHS’s admissions process, you must contact the LBR’s Secondary Admissions Department directly on 0208 478 3020.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ilford County High School

 

 

Year 7 admission to Ilford County High School is based on the results of an 11 Plus exam entrance test. Parents must register their child before the closing date via the LBR’s website. LBR does not accept any late applications, even under exceptional circumstances.

 

 

Ilford County High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Ilford County High School uses the CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) exam by the University of Durham. The exam covers the following subjects:

 

 

The tests are multiple-choice and results are fully standardised and age weighted, to ensure fairness for those sitting the exams.

 

How to Prepare for the Ilford County High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

In order to gain one of the 180 Year 7 places at Ilford County High School, your son may need to invest a significant amount of time in his 11+ exam preparation. Take a look at our guide to studying for the 11+ exam and help your son to create an in-depth study plan well ahead of the exam date.

 

The ICHS 11 Plus exam places emphasis on reasoning ability (numerical, verbal and non-verbal), so if your son requires some additional work in this area, we would suggest reading the following articles:

 

 

To give your child the best chance of gaining a place at ICHS, introduce practice exam papers into their revision routine early on, ideally under timed conditions.

 

For Ilford County High School 11 Plus revision, we would specifically recommend that your son works through these resources:

 

 

The information provided about Ilford County High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Founded in 1904, Highworth Grammar School is a selective, state-funded grammar open to girls aged 11-18, although boys are welcome in the sixth form. In 2011, the school gained academy status and has had Music Specialist Status since 2005.

 

With approximately 1300 pupils, the school teaches a traditional curriculum with an innovative streak. According to the school itself, they are ‘constantly looking to find ways of improving what [they] do’.

 

For an insight into academic life at Highworth Grammar School, watch this short promotional video, filmed by students:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Highworth Grammar School

 

 

Address: Highworth Grammar School, Quantock Drive, Ashford TN24 8UD

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@highworth.kent.sch.uk, 01233 624910

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,241 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 184

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All 184 Year 7 places at Highworth Grammar School are allocated on the basis of student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test, created by GL Assessment. All admissions are dealt with by the Local Authority (LA) and when parents are applying, they must apply directly to Kent County Council.

 

In cases where there are more suitable candidates than Year 7 places, Highworth Grammar School uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care.
  • Children who already have a sibling at the school at time of entry.
  • Children who have health or special access reasons.
  • Children who live closer to the school, at a permanent address.

 

Should a student not receive a Year 7 place at Highworth Grammar School, parents can appeal the decision. Our guide to grammar school appeals explains the process in detail for parents or guardians.

 

More information about Highworth Grammar School’s admission criteria is available on the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Highworth Grammar School

 

 

All applications for 11+ entry to Highworth Grammar School must go through the Local Authority, Kent County Council. Parents must complete the LA’s Secondary Common Application Form (SCAF), which can be done online. It is the LA that coordinates all Year 7 places, not the school, so parents are advised to contact the LA directly with any specific registration questions.

 

 

Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Highworth Grammar School, girls must reach the required standard in the Kent 11 Plus test. This test is standard across the county of Kent and most selective grammar schools in the area adhere to it.

 

The Kent 11+ exam is split into three sections:

 

  • Section 1 focuses on English and maths. Each subject is assessed with of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test. The paper is multiple-choice and an hour long overall.
  • Section 2 tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning. The test is multiple-choice and an hour long in total.
  • Section 3 is a writing task that lasts for 40 minutes. This is not marked as part of the overall 11+ score, but is considered when looking at borderline cases, or during an appeal process.

 

To get a better idea of what to expect from the Kent 11+ test, including a sample question, take a look at this article for parents.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

If your daughter is due to sit the Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus, she will require a supportive and structured study environment. Whatever her attainment levels, your daughter is likely to benefit from regular revision, covering the key subjects she’ll be tested on in the exam itself.

 

The Kent Test’s English section requires good comprehension skills, so encourage your child to read freely and then discuss their understanding of what they have read. Start with this reading list for 11 Plus level.

 

Our online practice papers will give your daughter the best possible chance of success in the Kent 11 Plus exam, with a view to gaining a Year 7 place at Highworth. The two resources below have been specifically designed for the Kent Test, and we would highly recommend including them in your daughter’s study plan. They replicate the format and style of the actual Kent Test covering all subjects, including Spatial Reasoning:

 

 

As the exam date draws closer, give your daughter additional papers to sit under timed conditions to help her better manage time pressure in the actual exam. The resources below will help as they all contain timed tests with questions like those that will appear in the Kent Test:

 

 

The information provided about Highworth Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Founded in 1904, Highsted Grammar School admits girls aged 11-18. Previously known as Sittingbourne High School for Girls until the 1950s, over 800 pupils currently attend this state-funded, selective grammar school in Kent.

 

In 2011, the school was converted into an academy and has gained recognition as a Specialist Science School. With an ‘Outstanding’ assessment from Ofsted, Highsted Grammar School prides itself on providing a traditional curriculum for its girls, while preparing them for the modern world.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Highsted Grammar School

 

 

Address: Highsted Grammar School, Highsted Road, Sittingbourne ME10 4PT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: admin@highsted.kent.sch.uk, 01795 424223

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 853 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL) / Highsted Test (optional)

 

 

Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Highsted Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. Since 2016, prospective pupils also have the option of taking the Highsted Test, set by the school itself. Both tests aim to assess whether a grammar school education is a suitable option for your child.

 

With 120 Year 7 places available at Highsted, should applications exceed this number, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care.
  • Children with a sibling at the school at the time of entry.
  • Children who, for health reasons, require them to attend a particular school.
  • Children who live closest to the school.

 

The parents of students who are not awarded a grammar school place at Highsted can appeal the decision in front of an Independent Appeals Panel.

 

Parents are also advised to check Highsted’s admission process directly via the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Highsted Grammar School

 

 

As Highsted Grammar School uses the Kent Test as a means of selection, parents must register online with Kent Local Authority (LA). Parents also have the option of registering their daughter for the Highsted Test, which is an additional test, but entirely optional. If you would like your daughter to sit the optional test, download and complete this registration form. The Highsted test has equal status for a place in Year 7 as a pass in the Kent Test.

 

Parents will receive results via post in mid-October and can also access the result via the LA’s website.

 

 

Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The majority of Kent-based selective schools require pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam and Highsted Grammar School is no exception. The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests.

 

Test 1: This is an hour-long exam, split into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

Test 2: This is a 60-minute test, focusing on reasoning, which is split into three sections:

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task, which might be referred to during borderline or appeal cases.

 

The Highsted Test also consists of two papers, that cover:

 

  1. Verbal ability, numeracy and non-verbal reasoning
  2. English – focusing on reading and writing skills

 

 

How to Prepare for the Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Ensure that your daughter is confident going into the Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus exam by starting revision early. Your child is likely to learn better if revision periods are split into manageable chunks, rather than lengthy, irregular sessions. Ensure that she is familiar with the layout of the exam and the types of questions she may be asked by referring to our practice exam paper resources. If you start this type of practice early enough, you will have a greater understanding of the areas that need more work.

 

To help your daughter gain a Year 7 place at Highsted Grammar School, we have created two practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

 

If your daughter needs to work on a particular subject, or simply needs more practice, why not try some of the practice exam paper packs below under timed conditions?

 

 

The information provided about Highsted Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Gravesend Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Gravesend Grammar School is a selective grammar school for boys aged 11-18. Girls are accepted into the sixth form from 16+. Based in Kent, Gravesend Grammar School was founded in 1893 and in 2011 became an academy. The school gained status as a maths and computing specialist school in 2004 and then, in 2008, also achieved specialist status as a language school.

 

Gravesend Grammar educates over 1,200 pupils, who experience a traditional academic curriculum and strong pastoral care from staff.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Gravesend Grammar School

 

 

Address: Gravesend Grammar School, Church Walk, Gravesend DA12 2PR

County: Kent

Admissions Info: cooki@gravesendgrammar.eu, 01474 331893

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,213 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL)

 

 

Gravesend Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Year 7 admission to Gravesend Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. Students currently in Year 5 at primary school are encouraged to attend Gravesend’s information evening in June of the summer term. This allows children to learn more about life at the grammar school and parents can ask questions about the admission process. The school provides a parents’ handbook for further information.

 

There is a total of 150 Year 7 places at the school. Should the number of boys who reach the required standard exceed the number of places available, the school uses the following criteria to allocate places:

 

  • Boys in Local Authority Care.
  • Boys with mental or physical impairments.
  • Boys with a sibling at the school.
  • Boys with a parent working at the school.

 

The school will also give priority to boys living within its catchment area.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Gravesend Grammar School

 

 

In the first instance, parents must register their child to sit the Kent Test; this can be done online via Kent County Council. Once the child has sat the test in September, parents will receive the results in October and must then submit their Secondary School Common Application Form (SCAF), again via the Kent Local Authority website.

 

 

Gravesend Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Gravesend Grammar School follows the Kent 11 Plus exam format, which is made up of: Reasoning, Maths and English, plus a writing task.

 

Your child can expect the following exam format:

 

  • Section 1:  This is an hour-long multiple-choice exam that aims to test students’ reasoning abilities. It is broken down into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  • Section 2: This is an hour-long multiple-choice exam that tests English and Maths.
  • Section 3: This is a 40-minute writing task. While not marked as part of the overall 11 Plus score, it can be used as evidence for both borderline cases and in appeals for a grammar school place.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Gravesend Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

The county of Kent is both the largest and most competitive grammar school area in the UK, so it’s imperative that your son prepares well for the Kent Test if you are aiming for Gravesend Year 7 entry.

 

Maximise the time your child has to revise by starting the process early and, in the lead-up to the exam, give them the best resources available. By being organised and sticking to a clear revision strategy, your son will find the Kent Test much easier to tackle.

 

Consider adding practice exam papers into your child’s revision routine ahead of the 11 Plus, as these can help you to monitor their progress and enable them to feel more comfortable with the whole process.
The following practice resources have been specifically designed for the Kent Test:

 

 

If your child needs additional practice in a particular subject area, we would recommend the following practice packs:

 

 

 

If you are concerned that you’ve left your son’s 11 Plus revision a little late, don’t worry; we have put together some actionable last minute tips on how to prepare for the exam.

 

The information provided about Gravesend Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

The Henrietta Barnett School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Founded in 1911, the Henrietta Barnett School (HBS) is a grammar school for girls aged 11 – 18. Located in the quiet surroundings of Hampstead Garden Suburb, the school became an academy in 2012.

 

HBS is known as one of the best academic state schools in the UK and consistently receives ‘outstanding’ Ofsted ratings. The school specialises in Music and English and, prior to becoming an academy, it was a Specialist Music College with English.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Henrietta Barnett School

 

 

Address: Henrietta Barnett School, Central Square, Hampstead Garden Suburb, London NW11 7BN

County: Hertfordshire/London Borough of Barnet

Admissions Info: admissions@hbschool.org.uk, 020 8458 8999

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 745 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 95 (approximately)

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September (Round One) and October (Round Two)

Exam Board Type: Part 1: CEM (University of Durham), Part 2 is written and set by the school

 

 

The Henrietta Barnett School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to The Henrietta Barnett School for Year 7 is by academic selection, following an 11 Plus exam. With over 2,000 applications and less than 100 Year 7 places available, the school strongly encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open days, which take place in July, to ensure HBS is the right learning environment for the student.

 

In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children in looked after care, or those who have previously been in looked after care.
  • Children eligible for Pupil Premium funding (up to 20 candidates only).
  • All remaining candidates in rank score order from 11 Plus exam(s).

 

For more information on The Henrietta Barnett School’s admission criteria, please visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Henrietta Barnett School

 

 

HBS follows the admissions process operated by the London Borough of Barnet. For your daughter to be considered for a Year 7 place, you must complete both the Common Application Form (CAF) via Barnet Local Authority and The Henrietta Barnett School Entrance Test Entry Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open.

 

It is important that parents apply to both the school and the Local Authority to be considered for a Year 7 place at HBS. If parents do not complete the school’s entry form on time, their daughter will not be able to take the entrance exam.

 

 

The Henrietta Barnett School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Henrietta Barnett School 11+ test consists of two rounds, divided as follows:

 

 

Following Round One, results from both sections will be combined and placed in rank order. The top 300 students will be invited back to sit the second exam (below).

 

  • Round Two: English and Mathematics. The English section will test a student’s comprehension and creative writing skills, while the maths section focuses on problem solving skills.

 

The results of both tests will be used to determine the final rankings and place allocations for Year 7.

 

 

How to Prepare for The Henrietta Barnett School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As one of the top girls’ schools in Britain, it’s no surprise that competition for Year 7 places at The Henrietta Barnett School is intense. However, by creating a good 11 Plus study plan, your child should be able to approach the exam confidently.

 

HBS is very clear about what students should expect from the entrance exam, so ensure that your daughter works on her Verbal Reasoning skills and make sure you read our 11 Plus guide to maths before creating a revision schedule. Practice exam papers are a great way to get your daughter used to the style of questions in the HBS 11 Plus exam and these papers can also help your child to work on their time-keeping ahead of the big day.

 

To begin with, why not try the resources outlined below?

 

11 Plus Maths: Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1  

11 Plus Maths: Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Maths: Multiplce Choice Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus  Comprehension (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Cloze (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Spelling

 

For Round 2 of the Henrietta Barnet 11 plus exam, the following packs will prove useful:

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

 

The information provided about Henrietta Barnett School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Founded in 1898, Heckmondwike Grammar School (HGS) is a co-educational grammar school and sixth form based in West Yorkshire that teaches children aged 11 – 18. A Technology College, HGS gained academy status in 2010 and has since specialised as a Language College. Over 1,300 pupils are split across four houses: Brontë, Clarke, Houldsworth and Priestley, and compete in inter-house competitions.

 

A high-performing academic school, HGS not only consistently appears in the top 100 state schools in Britain, it also prides itself on offering an array of extracurricular activities for pupils, including drama, arts and music.

 

For an insight into academic life at Heckmondwike Grammar School watch this short video that showcases the music department:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Heckmondwike Grammar School

 

 

Address: Heckmondwike Grammar School, High Street, Heckmondwike WF16 0AH

County: Yorkshire (Kirklees)

Admissions Info: info@heckgrammar.co.uk, 01924 402202

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,324 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Year 7 admission to Heckmondwike Grammar School is managed by the local authority, Kirklees Council. There are 180 places available in Year 7 and parents are encouraged to visit HGS ahead of registration. This allows both parents and children to learn more about the admission process and to ensure a grammar school education is suitable for the child.

 

Parents must include HGS as one of their school choices via the local authority’s common application system, which can be completed online. Usually, HGS is over-subscribed for places in Year 7 and uses the following criteria to determine priority:

 

  • Children who are in, or have previously been in, public care.
  • Children within the school’s catchment area.
  • Children with siblings already at the school.
  • Children who have a parent employed at the school at time of application and entry.

 

More information about the HGS’ admission criteria can be found on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Heckmondwike Grammar School

 

 

Year 7 admission to Heckmondwike Grammar School is based on the results of an 11 Plus exam entrance test. To enter for this exam, parents must register their child before the closing date via the Local Authority website. Parents must also complete a Supplementary Information Form via the school’s website.

 

Children of parents who miss the registration deadline will be considered as late applicants and those applications will only be considered once the initial round of allocations has been completed.

 

 

Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

In 2014, Heckmondwike Grammar School adopted the CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) exam by University of Durham. This test consists of two papers covering:

 

 

Each paper contains a mix of multiple-choice and standard format questions and the papers tend to present pupils with a mix of questions one after the other. Typically, students can expect a short maths section, and a longer problem-solving exercise, followed by plenty of vocabulary assessments in various formats as well as some comprehension. Children must manage their time well in order to complete the tests.

 

Test results are fully standardised and age weighted, to ensure fairness for all those sitting the exams. Parents will receive the 11 Plus test results in mid-October and the Local Authority will distribute formal offers in early March.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

To succeed in the 11 Plus exam, children need to be focused and invest time in their revision. Begin with our guide to studying for the 11+ exam and create a thorough study plan well ahead of the exam date.

 

The Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus exam focuses heavily on reasoning ability, so we would recommend reading the following articles on the relevant subjects:

 

 

The school is open to 180 new Year 7 students, but has reported receiving in excess of 800 registrations each year, so competition is very strong. To give your child the best chance of gaining a place at HGS, make sure they are taking practice exam papers under timed conditions. To complete the CEM 11 Plus test, pupils must answer questions quickly. In the final few weeks before the real exams, your child should sit practice papers under timed conditions until they can finish all the questions in the test papers within the allocated time.

 

For Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus revision, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Heckmondwike Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Handsworth Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Handsworth Grammar School (HGS) was founded in 1862 and today is a selective grammar school for boys aged 11-18. Located in Handsworth, just outside of Birmingham city centre, HGS is the oldest surviving selective school in the area.

 

Since 1997, girls have been permitted to attend the school’s sixth form and in total, the school teaches over 900 pupils. The school puts significant emphasis on teaching a well-rounded curriculum, one that accounts for pupils’ cultural and academic development. In Year 7, for example, pupils are required to complete ‘The Opening Minds Project’, covering subjects such as Citizenship.

 

For an insight into academic life at Handsworth Grammar School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Handsworth Grammar School

 

 

Address: Handsworth Grammar School, Grove Lane, Handsworth, Birmingham B21 9ET

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: 0121 554 2794

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 936 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: June / September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

Handsworth Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

In Birmingham, all eight grammar schools follow the admission criteria of ‘The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium’. Only pupils who reach the required standard via an entrance exam will be considered for entry to Handsworth Grammar School.

 

The Consortium requires that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. To be eligible for admission, pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam. Parents should note however, that attainment of the qualifying score doesn’t necessarily guarantee students a place at Handsworth.

 

Applicants are ranked according to their test score and if test scores are equal, priority is given to:

 

  • Looked after children and previously looked after children.
  • Children who live closest to the school.

 

More information about the admission policy at Handsworth Grammar School can be found on the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Handsworth Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Handsworth Grammar School, parents need to register their child by completing an online application form. Additionally, parents must complete a Local Authority Preference form. In order to complete the full application, parents must also provide a recent passport sized-photograph of their child, which can be emailed alongside the required forms.

 

Parents will receive their son’s 11 Plus test results in October, although place allocations will not be known until the following March.

 

 

Handsworth Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Handsworth Grammar School exam consists of two test papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes, with additional time for instructions. The papers are split into individually-timed sections that cover:

 

 

Most of the questions across the two papers are multiple-choice and children will be required to answer on a separate sheet.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Handsworth Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Many children are at first anxious about sitting the 11 Plus exam, but with thorough and regular revision, you can ensure that your child takes exam day in their stride.

 

Practice exam papers are an invaluable part of your son’s Handsworth Grammar School 11+ preparation. Doing these papers under timed conditions are a long-standing, proven method of effective revision. Not only do they give your child a clearer idea of the structure of the exam, they are also shown to improve a child’s time management – something that’s vital with the relatively quick-paced CEM 11 Plus exam.

 

We have a bundle of specific 11 Plus practice papers that can help your child prepare effectively for the Handsworth Grammar School exam. We would recommend:

 

 

The information provided about Handsworth Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Fort Pitt Grammar School website

Fort Pitt Grammar School is a selective girls’ grammar, with over 900 pupils aged between 11 and 18. Located in Chatham, one of the Medway towns in Kent, Fort Pitt gained academy status in 2010 and, since 2012, has worked with two other local schools as part of the Fort Pitt Grammar School Academy Trust. After merging the Trust with The Thomas Aveling School to form FPTA Academies, Fort Pitt was designated both a ‘Leading Edge’ school and a National Support School.

 

Pupils from all four houses compete in a number of events throughout the school year, including sports days, inter-house quizzes and academic events.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Fort Pitt Grammar School

 

 

Address: Fort Pitt Grammar School, Fort Pitt Hill, Chatham ME4 6TJ

County: Kent – Medway

Admissions Info: office@fortpitt.medway.sch.uk, 01634 842359

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 900 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus (CEM)

 

 

Fort Pitt Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

In Year 7, there are 120 places available at Fort Pitt determined by students’ performance in an entrance exam. Ahead of submitting an application, the school encourages parents to visit one of its open events. Schools within the Medway local authority use different allocation criteria for Year 7 places, so parents are advised to confirm Fort Pitt’s exact admission criteria directly with the school before completing the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

The Medway Test is only used by Medway grammar schools and children who attend a primary school in the area will take the 11 Plus exam at their current school. Those living outside of the area will take the exam in an independent test centre. Schools in Medway send parents their child’s 11+ result before having to choose which schools to apply for, which aims to ensure you make the best decision for your child.

 

More information on the Fort Pitt Grammar School exam can be accessed on the Medway local authority website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Fort Pitt Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Fort Pitt Grammar School, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF), as administered by the Medway local authority. All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about the registration process.

 

In the case of oversubscription for places, the school uses criteria outlined here to determine which students are given priority.

 

 

Fort Pitt Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Fort Pitt Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

 

Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple-choice and last 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and also lasts 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

Previously in The Medway Test, the 11 Plus Maths and writing sections have been double-weighted in comparison to the Verbal Reasoning. That means the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the Verbal Reasoning score in the Medway 11+.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Fort Pitt Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

To be considered for a place at Fort Pitt Grammar School, your daughter must sit the Medway Test at 11 Plus. To maximise your child’s chance of success, it’s important keep stress levels low. When to start 11 Plus preparation is up to parents, but at Exam Papers Plus, we would recommend starting early rather than having to cram for the 11+ at the last minute. A steady approach to exam revision means your daughter is more likely to approach the Fort Pitt exam calmly and confidently.

 

The Medway Test doesn’t allow much time for pondering on answers, so ahead of the exam itself, encourage your daughter to do some 11 Plus practice papers, particularly under timed conditions, to get her used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For the Fort Pitt Grammar School 11+ exam, we would recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Maths (CEM)

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ English Spelling

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about Fort Pitt Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Ermysted’s Grammar School website

Founded in 1492, Ermysted’s Grammar School is located in the market town of Skipton in North Yorkshire. A selective school with over 800 boys in attendance, Ermysted’s is funded by its local education authority. The seventh oldest school in Great Britain, the school has consistently reported excellent examination results and in 2006 was noted as the best school in Yorkshire, and amongst the top 25 nationally.

 

Pupils are split into four houses: Ermysted, Hartley, Petyt and Toller, all named after notable figures in the school’s history. Throughout the school year, the houses participate in a variety of competitions.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Ermysted’s Grammar School

 

 

Address: Ermysted Grammar School, Gargrave Road, Skipton BD23 1PL

County: North Yorkshire

Admissions Info: admin@ermysteds.n-yorks.sch.uk, 01756 792186

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 815 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Ermysted’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Ermysted’s Grammar School is maintained by the North Yorkshire Education Authority, which coordinates all of the School’s admissions via its selection scheme. There are 120 places available at Year 7 and priority is given to those who live within the school’s catchment area. To be considered for a place at the school, all prospective pupils must take the 11 Plus test coordinated by GL Assessment.

 

The school will offer places to the highest scoring 28% of pupils who live within the catchment area. In the event of any surplus places, these will be offered to pupils outside of the catchment.

 

In recent years, there has been five Year 7 applications for every one place, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will adhere to the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  • Boys who are currently, or have previously been, looked after by the Local Authority.
  • Boys who live within the catchment area.
  • Boys who live outside of the catchment area.

 

Get more details about Ermysted’s Year 7 admission criteria.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ermysted’s Grammar School

 

 

Boys living within Ermysted’s Grammar School’s catchment area will be automatically entered into the Local Authority’s selection scheme (unless parents choose to withdraw their child from the process). Those living outside of the catchment can apply online via the Local Authority’s website. Parents should be aware that testing may not be possible for pupils who registered after the closing date until after the date of allocation of school places.

 

Parents will receive details of their child’s results in October and place allocations will be distributed in March the following year.

 

 

Ermysted’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus test for Ermysted’s Grammar School consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is divided into four sections, with 10 minutes allocated to each one. Once a section has been completed by pupils, they cannot go back to that section.

 

How to Prepare for the Ermysted’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

With its strong reputation for an excellent all-round education, Ermysted’s Grammar School attracts applicants from over 50 primary schools in its local area and beyond. With this in mind, parents should be prepared to start their child’s 11 Plus revision well ahead of the actual exam.

 

North Yorkshire’s Local Authority 11 Plus tests focus on reasoning, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

Practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing your child’s confidence for the Ermysted’s Grammar School’s 11+, as they can help familiarise them with the test requirements and better understand the types of reasoning questions they may be asked.

 

As test day gets closer, consider doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for Ermysted’s exam; we would recommend the following:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about Ermysted’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Dover Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus website

Initially founded in 1904 as Dover County School, Dover Grammar School for Girls was established in 1910. The school educates over 700 pupils, primarily girls aged 11 to 18, although the school’s Sixth Form does admit boys from ages 16 to 18.

 

Since 1910, pupils have been split into four houses: Hubert de Burgh, St Martin, Queen Ethelburga, and Stephen de Pencester. The school prides itself on offering a broad range of extracurricular activities, including art, sports and drama clubs.

 

For a brief insight into academic life at Dover Grammar School for Girls, watch this promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dover Grammar School for Girls

 

 

Address: Dover Grammar School for Girls, Frith Road, Dover CT16 2PZ

County: Kent

Admissions Info: enquiries@dggs.kent.sch.uk, 01304 206 625

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 789 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test or the Dover Test

 

Dover Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Prospective pupils have the choice of sitting either the Dover Test or the Kent Test at 11 Plus. Students must take at least one of these tests in order to be considered for a Year 7 place, although many opt to take both. Before registering your daughter, it is advised that both parents and students visit the school on one of its open events in June. At these events, school staff will answer any questions you may have regarding the school’s admissions process.

 

In recent years, the ratio of applicants to Year 7 places at Dover Grammar School for Girls has been 3:1. When the number of applicants exceeds the spaces available, places will be allocated in the following order of priority:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care, or previously in Local Authority Care
  • Children with a sibling already attending the school
  • Medical, health, social and special access reasons
  • Children in receipt of Pupil Premium
  • Nearness of children’s homes to school

 

Find out more about the school’s Year 7 admissions process.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dover Grammar School for Girls

 

 

Parents of students who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test, you must complete an online registration form. Application forms to sit the Dover Test can be found on the school’s website. Please note: for the Dover Test, the school will not accept any late applications.

 

Once your daughter has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online.

 

If you have any further queries about Dover Grammar School for Girls’ admissions process at Year 7, call the school on 01304 206 625 or email enquiries@dggs.kent.sch.uk.

 

Dover Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Dover Grammar School for Girls uses both the Kent 11 Plus exam and the Dover Test.

 

The Kent Exam consists of Reasoning, English and Maths, as well as a writing task. The exam takes the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long, multiple-choice exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Girls will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long, multiple-choice exam that tests English and Maths. Each question will have 5 answer choices and your child will need to mark their responses on a separate answer sheet.
  3. A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline or appeal cases.

 

Would you like to learn more about the Kent Test? This article explains everything you need to know.

 

The Dover Test covers Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning and also tests at the Key Stage 2 National Curriculum Maths and English level.

 

How to Prepare for the Dover Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Kent is the largest and most competitive grammar school area in England, with 35 selective schools. Therefore, it’s important that both you and your child understand the 11 Plus process. It is vital to maximise the time and resources available to your child in the lead-up to the test. With a strong revision strategy, your child will be better placed to tackle both the Kent and Dover tests.

 

If you’re unsure of your child’s current ability, practice exam papers are a good way of establishing their strengths and weaknesses. It’s vital to introduce this type of practice into your child’s 11 Plus study routine and it allows you to closely monitor their progress.

 

Pupils sitting The Kent Test, with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at Dover Grammar School for Girls, will benefit from these resources:

 

 

These practice tests cover every aspect of the exam including Mathematics, English and Reasoning, making them ideal for your daughter.

 

Additional revision for specific subjects can be found in the following practice exam papers:

 

 

 

The information provided about Dover Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Dover Grammar School for Boys website

A selective secondary school, Dover Grammar School for Boys was founded in 1905 and educates over 700 boys aged 11 to 18, although it does accept girls into its sixth form. In 2010, the school achieved an ‘Outstanding’ rating by Ofsted and has been awarded an International Schools Award due to its close links with other schools around the world.

 

A community-minded school, Dover Grammar School for Boys is also home to a successful Combined Cadet Force, which is open to pupils from Year 8 upwards from the surrounding area of Kent.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dover Grammar School for Boys

 

 

Address: Dover Grammar School for Boys, Astor Avenue, Dover CT17 0DQ

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@dgsg.co.uk, 01304 206117

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 758 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL) or Dover Grammar School Test

 

 

Dover Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Dover Grammar School for Boys in Year 7 is based on pupil performance in the Kent Test, or the school’s own entrance test. Before parents commit to registering their son, the school recommends attending one of its open events. This will give you a better idea as to whether or not your son would be suited to a grammar school education.

 

Dover Grammar School for Boys has a maximum of 120 places allocated in Year 7. In case of oversubscription, the school gives priority to:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care
  • Children with a sibling already attending the school at the time of entry
  • Medical, health and special access reasons
  • Children who live close to the school (and can prove it is their permanent home)

 

Visit the school’s website for more information about its admissions process in Year 7.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dover Grammar School for Boys

 

 

In the first instance, parents should complete and submit separate registration forms for the Kent Test and/or the Dover Boys Test. Your son’s current primary school can help you register for the Kent Test, or you can refer to Kent County Council’s website.

 

For the Dover Boys Test, an application form can be found via the school’s website. Once your son has taken the entrance exam, an application needs to be made through your local authority’s application system (a Secondary Common Application Form). In most cases, applications can be made online through your local authority’s website.

 

More details about the registration process are available by emailing the school at office@dgsg.co.uk or calling the main office on 01304 206117.

 

 

Dover Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Kent has its own 11 Plus exam, the Kent Test, which is used to allocate Year 7 places. Dover Grammar School for Boys also has the Dover Test. It is not necessary for pupils to take both exams.

 

The Kent Test’s format is as follows:

 

  1. Reasoning: A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities, split into multiple sections. These sections covers Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  2. English and Maths: A one-hour exam, split into two sections. The English section tests comprehension and literacy skills, while the multiple-choice maths section covers a range of topics, including arithmetic.
  3. Writing: This 40-minute task is not marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but can be referred to during an appeal case.

 

The Dover Test covers similar topics, including Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning and also tests at Key Stage 2 National Curriculum maths and English level.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Dover Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Even though your son can take two different tests to try and gain a place at Dover Grammar School for Boys, that needn’t mean twice the stress. In fact, creating a stress-free environment for him in the run-up to his exam is important – and achievable. It’s important to keep motivation levels high, so use revision time as an opportunity to play learning games with your child. Make sure your son is working on topics that he struggles with rather than repeating ones he already knows; this is a more efficient use of time.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we’re experts in exam preparation. We have devised online practice papers specific to the Kent 11 Plus Test. These tests have been created by assessment experts and fully replicate the actual exam format and structure. To gain one of the 120 Year 7 places at Dover Grammar School for Boys, your son must show skill in several areas. These tests will allow him to build his confidence and improve his overall performance as the exam date draws closer.

 

If your son is taking the Kent 11 Plus Test, we would fully recommend the following practice papers to begin with:

 

 

If your child requires further practice in a particular subject area ahead of the exam, you can choose also from the following:

 

The information provided about Dover Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Devonport High School for Girls website

Located in Plymouth, Devonport High School for Girls (DHSG) teaches over 800 girls aged 11 to 18. A selective girls’ state grammar school, it gained academy status in 2011. Due to funding received through its Specialist Language College status in 2005, DHSG updated its facilities to include first-rate computer rooms, language laboratories and a contemporary library.

 

Pupils consistently produce excellent exam results and the school is noted for the significant progress students make through to GCSE level.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Devonport High School for Girls

 

 

Address: Devonport High School for Girls, Lyndhurst Road, Peverell, Plymouth PL2 3DL

County: Devon

Admissions Info: secondary.admissions@plymouth.gov.uk, 01752 307469

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 810 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Devonport High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Application for admission to Devonport High School for Girls is made through Plymouth City Council and all prospective Year 7 pupils must take the 11 Plus exam in September before the year of entry. Each of the 120 places available at DHSG are dealt with by the local authority and parents must apply for a school place via the Council’s website.

 

You can find more details about DHSG’s admissions process via the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Devonport High School for Girls

 

 

To gain a Year 7 place at DHSG, all prospective pupils must take the 11 Plus exam. You can register your daughter via this online registration form.

 

Girls will sit the 11 Plus tests in September and parents will receive results in mid-October. Places will be allocated in early March and parents must respond to this allocation within two weeks. It is expected that all grammar school places for DHSG will be filled within one allocation round; late applications won’t be included in the first round of allocations.

 

Devonport High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam at Devonport High School is split into three papers:

 

  1. Multiple-choice English
  2. Written English
  3. Multiple-choice maths

 

While results from both multiple-choice GL Assessment papers are marked, the written English comprehension test set by the school does not count toward a pupil’s final assessed mark and tends to be considered in appeal cases only.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Devonport High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

With its consistently strong exam results and first class pastoral care for pupils, Devonport High School for Girls is considered one of the best selective schools in Devon. This means competition Year 7 entry is high and your daughter will have to perform well in all 11 Plus exams to be in with a chance of securing a place.

 

The key to effectice 11 Plus exam preparation is regular revision and testing, little and often. Once you have established a revision routine with your child, gradually introduce them to questions similar to those that they may be asked in the exams. Practice exam papers can go a long way in improving a child’s performance at 11 Plus level, as they will already be comfortable with the structure ahead of the exam itself.

 

To give your child the best opportunity of securing a Year 7 place at Devonport High School for Girls, we can recommend the following 11+ practice tests, which have been specifically designed with the Devonport 11 plus exam in mind:

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ English Spelling Pack

11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (GL)

 

The information provided about Devonport High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Devonport High School for Boys website

Devonport High School for Boys (DHSB) is located in Plymouth and is a boys’ grammar that educates approximately 1,135 pupils. Founded in 1896, the school admits pupils aged between 11 and 18. In 2002, it was one of just four schools in England to be designated as a specialist engineering college. In 2007, Devonport was awarded High Performing Secondary Schools status for its language specialisms and Applied Learning. The school became an academy in 2011. Pupils are split between six houses: Campbell, Edison, Newton, Priestley, Smeaton and Winstanley.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Devonport High School for Boys

 

 

Address: Devonport High School for Boys, Paradise Road, Stoke, Plymouth PL1 5QP

County: Devon

Admissions Info: sarah.nicholson@dhsb.org, 01752 208787

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,135 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Devonport High School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Devonport High School for Boys currently admits 180 pupils in Year 7. Admission to the school at this stage is determined by each pupil’s performance in the 11 Plus exam. Due to a wide catchment area that extends well beyond Plymouth, the school is very popular for Year 7 applications and so parents are advised to attend one of the school’s open days. At the event, you’ll have the opportunity to hear from the school’s headteacher and learn more about the admissions process.

 

Should the school be oversubscribed for Year 7 places, it uses the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. Pupils who are, or have previously been, in looked-after care.
  2. Pupils in receipt of the pupil or service premium at the date of testing
  3. Children of a member of staff who has been employed at the school for two or more years or children whose parents work at the school.
  4. The student’s mark in the English paper.
  5. Distance from the school, with those living closer to DHSB given priority.

 

Get more information about Devonport High School for Boys’ Year 7 admissions process.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Devonport High School for Boys

 

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit the entrance tests need to register with the school before the September exam dates. In the first instance, parents need to complete this online registration form.

 

Prospective DHSB pupils will sit the entrance exams over two dates in September and parents will receive results in mid-October. The results of the examination don’t confirm that a place will be offered; offer letters will be issued in March the following year and only then will you know if your child has been successful in gaining a place at DHSB.

 

Devonport High School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Devonport High School for Boys’ 11 Plus exam consists of three tests:

 

  • English
  • Mathematics
  • Creative writing paper, set by the school

 

The English and maths papers are both multiple choice, while the 40-minute Creative writing paper requires pupils to plan and write a piece of descriptive text. Pupils will be marked on sentence structure, punctuation, composition, spelling and vocabulary.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Devonport High School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Preparation for the Devonport High School for Boys’ 11 Plus exams needn’t be stressful. All you need is good organisation and the right resources. If you’re feeling overwhelmed by the amount of 11 Plus advice online, then have a read our 11 Plus guide for parents – it’s a great place to start!

 

As DHSB’s 11 Plus exams focus on maths and English, we would also recommend taking a look at these articles:

 

Use the run-up to the exams as an opportunity to test your child with practice papers. An understanding of the exam layout and structure is vital if your son is going to feel comfortable under exam conditions.

For Devonport High School for Boys’ 11 Plus, we would recommend the following practice resources for your son:

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Problem Solving (GL)

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ English Spelling

 

The information provided about Devonport High School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Dartford Grammar School for Girls website

Established in 1904, Dartford Grammar School for Girls admits girls aged 11-18. Previously known as Dartford County, approximately 1,000 students currently attend this Kent-based school.

 

A grant-maintained school, in 2008 Dartford was reaccredited as a science specialist school. It is a high-performing grammar and is one of Dartford’s top performing state schools.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dartford Grammar School for Girls

 

 

Address: Dartford Grammar School for Girls, Shepherds Lane, Dartford DA1 2NT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: school@dartfordgrammargirls.kent.sch.uk, 01322 223123

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,064 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

 

Dartford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Dartford Grammar School for Girls, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. The test exists to assess whether grammar school is a suitable option for your child.

 

With 180 Year 7 places available, Dartford Grammar School for Girls is often over-subscribed. In such cases the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

  • Children in Local Authority Care
  • Pupils who are eligible for free school meals
  • Students who already have a sibling at the school
  • Students who live closest to the school (100 places allocated here)

 

The parents of students who are not awarded a Grammar School place can appeal the decision in front of an Independent Appeals Panel.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dartford Grammar School for Girls

 

 

In order to apply for Year 7 entry to the school, parents need to register their child online with the Kent Local Authority (LA), or request a paper registration form by contacting the Secondary Admissions Team at Kent LA.

 

Test results will be posted out in mid-October and parents can also view the results online. For more information about Dartford Grammar School for Girls’ registration process at the 11 Plus stage, email school@dartfordgrammargirls.kent.sch.uk or call 01322 223123.

 

 

Dartford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Along with the majority of Kent-based selective schools, Dartford Grammar for Girls requires pupils to take the Kent 11 Plus exam, which consists of two multiple-choice tests with a separate answer sheet.

 

The first test is one hour long and is split into two sections, English and Maths. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

The second test is a reasoning paper and is split into three sections:

 

The Verbal Reasoning section is 30 minutes long, including a 10 minute practice section. The Non-Verbal and Spatial Reasoning tests are each around 15 minutes long, including practice sections.

 

Prospective pupils are also required to sit a 40-minute writing task. Although this isn’t marked as part of the 11+ exam, it could be used in appeal cases, borderline cases or at a Headteacher’s request.

 

You can see some sample questions for the Kent 11 Plus Exam here.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Dartford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

The Kent Test varies from year to year, but children are still able to maximise their potential in the exam through good preparation. When to begin preparation will depend on your child’s current attainment, but with a set revision plan, all children will benefit from regular practice sessions.

 

For the Dartford Grammar School for Girls 11+ test, a good place to start is with practice exam papers. This not only gives pupils an idea of the types of questions they can expect in the real exam, but can provide parents with a good indication of their child’s current abilities.

 

Gaining a Year 7 place at a Kent-based school isn’t always easy. We have designed two practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

 

Once your child has completed these, you might notice gaps in their knowledge, or that they aren’t as strong in a particular subject area. If this the case, you can choose the most appropriate subject-specific resource pack to help strengthen their individual subject knowledge:

 

 

The information provided about Dartford Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

reenshot of the Dane Court Grammar School website

Established in 1957 as a Technical High School, Dane Court is a co-educational grammar located in the coastal town of Broadstairs in Kent. Open to 1,200 pupils aged 11 to 18, it received academy status in 2011.

 

Dane Court became a Specialist Language College in 2003 and has since invested a significant amount of resources into promoting languages within its community. Pupils are divided into six houses, with 300 of those sitting within the school’s sixth form.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dane Court Grammar School

 

 

Address: Dane Court Grammar School, Broadstairs Road, Broadstairs, CT10 2RT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: admin@danecourt.kent.sch.uk, 01843 864941

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1202 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 165

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

 

Dane Court Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Dane Court Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. The school has 165 Year 7 places available, but the school is consistently (and heavily) oversubscribed. In cases where the number of applicants is greater than the spaces available at the school, Dane Court Grammar School uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children who are presently or were previously in Local Authority Care
  • Medical/health and special access reasons
  • Students who already have a sibling at the school
  • Students who live closest to the school

 

The parents of students who are not awarded a place can appeal the decision in front of an Independent Appeals Panel. Specific details of the appeals process are usually sent to parents at the same time as the offer letter.

 

If you would like to appeal a Grammar School decision, take a look at this useful article that explains the process for parents or guardians.

 

More information about Dane Court Grammar School’s admissions criteria is available on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dane Court Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Dane Court Grammar School, parents must complete a registration form by July prior to the year of entry and a Common Application Form (CAF). More details about Dane Court’s registration process are available by contacting the school directly on 01843 864 941, or by emailing admin@danecourt.kent.sch.uk.

 

Dane Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Pupils wishing to attend Dane Court Grammar School from Year 7 must take and pass the Kent 11 Plus exam. The tests cover English, maths and reasoning and also a writing task. The exam is used to assess whether your child is suitable for entry to the school and the format is used by the majority of the 35 wholly selective and 4 partially selective grammar schools in the Kent region.

 

The Kent 11+ exam format is:

 

  • Section 1: A one hour exam that tests English and maths. Both topics have a 5 minute practice exercise and a 25 minute test
  • Section 2: A one hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning

 

Learn more about the Kent 11+ Test, including sample questions, here.

 

How to Prepare for the Dane Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Exam revision can be a fraught period for both children and their parents, particularly if preparation is left until the last minute. With only one chance to impress at the 11 Plus stage, Exam Papers Plus offers a complete solution to exam preparation. With our online practice papers, you can give your child the edge over the competition in the Kent 11 Plus exam and maximise their chances of gaining a much-coveted place at Dane Court Grammar School.

 

Starting your child’s revision plan early can ensure that they aren’t overwhelmed with new information as the exam date draws closer. Thorough preparation also means you’re well aware of any weak areas that require additional work in the lead up to the exam.

 

Competition for Year 7 places at Dane Court Grammar School is fierce, so we would recommend taking a look at these resources that have been specifically designed for the Kent Test:

 

 

If your child needs additional practice in a particular subject area, we would recommend the following practice packs:

 

 

The information provided about Dane Court Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.